JP2013212133A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing the fun of the game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a forecast means of forecasting start information stored in a start information storage means; a decoration symbol display means for executing decorative symbol variation display for stopping a decorative symbol mode corresponding to a symbol mode after starting variation of a decorative symbol; and a performance control means for controlling the decorative symbol display means. The performance control means can execute advance notice notification for giving an advance notice as to whether a winning/losing determination means derives a specific winning/losing determination result according to a forecast result of the forecast means before execution of symbol variation display based on start information stored in a start information storage means, can execute first advance notice notification for suggesting contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information when the forecast result shows a first winning/losing type, and can execute second advance notice notification irrelevant to the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information when the forecast result shows a second winning/losing type.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a spinning machine (slot machine), a ball game machine (pachinko machine), and the like.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming table that performs symbol variation display has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game machine has a problem in that the game is monotonous and the player's interest is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve such conventional problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that can improve the interest of the game machine.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention acquires start information storing means capable of storing start information generated based on a game ball entering the start area, and start information stored in the start information storing means, Based on the acquired starting information and the gaming state at the time of acquiring the starting information, a determination unit for determining whether or not to derive the determination result, and a symbol corresponding to the determination result after performing the variable display of the symbol Stored in the starting information storage means, a symbol display means for displaying a variation of the pattern, a game state control means for controlling to a special gaming state after a specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, Pre-reading means capable of pre-reading the starting information, and a decorative symbol capable of executing a decorative symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect after starting the variation of the decorative symbol Display means, and an effect control means capable of controlling the decorative symbol display means, wherein the effect control means is a symbol variation display based on start information stored in the start information storage means Prior to the execution of the prior notice, it is possible to perform a notice to notify whether or not the validity determination means derives a specific validity determination result corresponding to the prefetching result of the prefetching means, the prefetching means, As the pre-reading result of the start information, a first hit type and a second pass / fail type can be derived, and the effect control unit is configured such that the pre-read result obtained by pre-reading the start-up information by the pre-read unit is the first pass / fail type. In some cases, it is possible to execute a first notice that suggests the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information, and the prefetch result obtained by prefetching the start information by the prefetch means is the second success / failure Is capable of executing a second notice informing not related to the content of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information to be another, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the interest of the gaming machine can be improved.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (B) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 1) is shown. (C) An example of the high-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (D) An example of the low-probability state table for special determination (special drawing 2) is shown. (A) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1. FIG. (B) It is an example of the special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the abnormality determination value table for variable winning openings for performing abnormality determination of the number of balls entered to the 1st variable winning opening 234 and the 2nd variable winning opening 235. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the abnormality determination value table for special figure starting ports for performing abnormality determination of the number of balls entering into the 2nd special figure starting opening 232. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the table selection table for determining the variation classification determination table mentioned later. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the table selection opportunity table for determining No in a table selection table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the variation type A determination table for determining the variation type A. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation classification B determination table for determining the fluctuation | variation classification B. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the timer number determination table for determining a timer number. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a winning opening counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prefetch process. (A) It is the figure which showed the structural example of the starting information storage area. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of a structure of the prefetch information storage area. It is a figure showing the contents of prefetch information. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed an example of the pending | holding increase command transmitted to the 1st sub-control part 400, after prefetching by the winning of the 1st special figure starting port 230. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an effect control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a pending | holding icon display control process. (C) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize alerting | reporting control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a fluctuation | variation icon display control process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is the figure which showed an example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the icon displayed as the hold icons 1-4 and the fluctuation icon. It is the figure which showed the other example of the icon of (b)-(d). (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure holding | maintenance display area in case the production mode is mode A (dono mode). (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure holding | maintenance display area in case production modes are mode B (princess mode). (C) It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure holding | maintenance display area | region when production | presentation modes are mode C (爺 mode). (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed an example of transfer of production mode. (A)-(d) It is the figure which showed the special reservation display area which concerns on the modifications 1-4. (A) It is the figure which showed the other example of the holding | maintenance icon in the special figure holding | maintenance display area 208j shown in the said FIG.25 (b). (B) It is the figure which showed the other example of the holding | maintenance icon in the special figure holding | maintenance display area 208m shown in the said FIG.27 (d). (C) It is the figure which showed the other example of the holding | maintenance icon in the special figure holding | maintenance display area 208j shown in the said FIG.25 (b). (A) It is an example when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is shut off when the production mode is mode B (princess mode) and the mode is changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power is restored. (B) An example in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power cut off) when the production mode is mode C (爺 mode) and the mode is changed to mode A (female mode) after the power is restored (after power recovery). It is. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to special unspecified hold display from the special specific hold display at the time of the start of reach production. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to a special specific hold display from a special non-specific hold display at the end of reach production. (C) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to a special unspecified hold display from a special specific hold display at the time of the start of a big hit game. (D) It is the figure which showed the example which transfers to a special specific hold display from a special unspecified hold display at the time of completion | finish of a big hit game. The figure which showed an example when the power supply to the pachinko machine 100 was interrupted when the production mode was mode B (princess mode) and special unspecified hold display was made, and the mode changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power was restored It is. It is the figure which showed the example which performs special unspecified hold display with the increase in hold of a special figure variable game as a trigger. It is the figure which showed the example which performs a special unspecified hold display triggered by the several hold increase of a special figure variable game. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which covers a part of special special figure reservation display area 208j with the 2nd production movable body 225 which is one of the movable objects. (B) It is the figure which showed the example which covers a part of special special figure reservation display area 208j with the shielding apparatus 246 which is one of the movable objects. (A)-(c) It is the figure which showed the example which covers a part of display regarding a big hit game, and a special special figure holding | maintenance display with the production movable body 224 which is one of the movable objects. (A) It is the figure which showed the example which erases (or displays) a special special figure hold display and a normal special figure hold display in the same direction, when the number of hold of a special figure variable game decreases (or increases). (B) It is the figure which showed the example which erases (or displays) a special special figure holding | maintenance display and a normal special figure holding | maintenance display in the opposite direction when the number of holdings of a special figure variable game decreases (or increases). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 260 which concerns on a modification from the front. It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 260 shown in FIG. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 260 which concerns on a modification from the front. It is the figure which showed the example of displaying the number of suspension of special figure 1 variable game, and the number of suspension of special figure 2 variable game separately, and covering the number of suspension of special figure 2 variable game with a movable body. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of the prize alerting | reporting at the time of detecting one over winning after the maximum winning. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of an overwinning. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of a prize alert | report at the time of detecting two over winnings after maximum winning. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of (b)-(d) over winning. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of other winning alert | reports when two over winnings are detected. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of (b)-(c) over winning. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of a prize alert | report when one over-winning is detected after a door member is closed. (B) It is the figure which showed execution of a prize alert | report when one over-winning is detected before a door member closes. (A) It is the figure which showed the execution timing of the abnormality generation alert | report performed by a prize abnormality response process. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect of abnormality notification. It is the figure which showed the example which outputs an abnormality occurrence signal based on multiple types of factors. (A) It is the time chart which showed the example which performs abnormality generation alerting | reporting during over-winning alerting | reporting. (B) It is the time chart which showed the example which performs abnormality occurrence alerting simultaneously with over-winning alerting | reporting. It is the figure which showed a part of prefetch information which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the holding icon display mode lottery table according to the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the holding icon display mode lottery table according to the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the holding icon display mode lottery table according to the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the holding icon display mode lottery table according to the second embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation icon display mode lottery table which concerns on Embodiment 2. FIG. It is the figure which showed the example 1 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 2 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 3 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 4 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 5 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 6 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 7 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a hold icon. It is the figure which showed the example 8 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 9 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the figure which showed the example 10 of a display of a fluctuation | variation icon and a holding | maintenance icon. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process part of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for the success / failure determination in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the special figure determination table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer number selection table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the type of effect that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the internal structure of ROM406 and VRAM436 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of reproducing the movie A and displaying a texture image superimposed on the said movie A in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the flow of the image drawing process at the time of displaying the texture image which appears from the outside of a display area in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the standby animation of the hold icon in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the presentation control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the pending | holding icon display control processing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the change icon display control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the holding | maintenance icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation icon display mode lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-8 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-8 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-9 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-10 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-8 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-8 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-9 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-10 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-10 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-11 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 2-11 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-4 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-5 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-6 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-7 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-8 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-9 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-10 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-11 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-12 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-13 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-14 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-15 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-16 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-17 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-17 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect display in Example 3-17 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-18 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-19 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-20 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-20 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-21 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-21 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-22 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-22 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-23 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-24 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-25 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-26 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-27 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-28 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-29 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-30 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-30 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. In the 4th Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows the example by which the hold icon of special figure 1 and the hold icon of special figure 2 were displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 3-31 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure explaining the phenomenon which may arise when the image is reduced in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining what kind of texture data needs to be provided when displaying the animation which expands and contracts an image in the 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the phenomenon which may arise when transparency is changed in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the overlap display between hold icons or between a hold icon and another image in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the animation of the pending | holding icon in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the animation of the pending | holding icon in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the animation of the pending | holding icon in the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold display in the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold display in the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows another example of the hold display in the 4th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the modification of the kind of the special figure in the 4th Embodiment of this invention, a decoration design, and a common figure.

<Embodiment 1>
Hereinafter, the gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Back>
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  Although details will be described later, a decorative design display device 208, a first effect movable body 224 that imitates a human arm, and a second effect movable body 225 with a general character are provided at the approximate center of the game area 124. An effect device 206 having the above is arranged. In the lower right of the game area 124, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol hold lamp 216, and the first special symbol hold lamp 218 are displayed. In addition, a second special symbol holding lamp 220 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL ( Other display devices including an electroluminescence display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 includes a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. The positions and sizes of the display areas 208a to 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, in a lower area of the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, A first variable winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent out to a player may be referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided at the lower right of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, one is arranged below the center part of the game board 200 and one at the lower right. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 have the same structure, and include door members 234a and 235a that can be freely opened and closed, and balls cannot be entered while the door members 234a and 235a are closed. When the special figure display device wins the special figure display game and the special symbol display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door members 234a and 235a have a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). Opening and closing at the number of times (for example, 15 times).

  In this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable game is won, the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234 is opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and when the special figure 2 variable game is won. Opens and closes the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven to win a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls). It is discharged as a sphere into the upper plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the spear 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (the general winning hole 226, the first variable winning hole 234, the first 2 variable prize winning opening 235) or starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or ordinary opening The outlet 240 is reached only by passing through 228.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, the first effect movable body 224, and the second effect movable body 225.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the first effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow is provided. The first effect movable body 224 moves in an arc in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. The second effect movable body 225 includes a motor (not shown), and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the first variable winning port 234, and a second variable winning port. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 235a of 235 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 also includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the first effect movable body 224 and the second effect movable body 225, and the current positions of the first effect movable body 224 and the second effect movable body 225. An effect movable body sensor 424 to detect, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, A gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 for controlling the gaming table frame lamp 542, and a serial for performing lighting control by serial communication between the gaming board lamp driving circuit 530 and the gaming table frame lamp driving circuit 540 The communication control circuit 520 is connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. 12A shows 12 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure L” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R special jackpot A or 16R probability variation A), and "Special figure B" is a 16R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 16R special jackpot B or 16R). "Special figure C" is a 16R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 16R jackpot or 16R normal). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (or a probability variation state), and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state (or a non-probability variation state).

  In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game ends and after the 16R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the short time state (electric support state). Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is called the normal high probability state (or electric support state), and the state that does not enter the time reduction state is the normal low probability state (or non-electrical state). It is called a support state. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B”, which are 16R special jackpot symbols, are in a high probability state of special figure high probability, and “Special Figure C”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability normal figure height. Probability state. These “special illustrations A” to “special illustration C” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  "Special Figure D" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot A or 4R probability variation A), and "Special Figure E" is a 4R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 4R special jackpot B or 4R probability variation B). Compared with “Special Drawing A” to “Special Drawing C” which is 16R, “Special Drawing D” and “Special Drawing E” are different in that they are 4R. "Special Figure F" is a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R special jackpot A or 2R probability variation A), and "Special Figure G" is also referred to as a 2R special jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as 2R special jackpot B or 2R probability variation B). "Special figure H" is a 2R jackpot symbol (hereinafter also referred to as 2R jackpot or 2R normal), compared to "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure C" which is 16R, "Special Figure F" ~ "Special Figure H" is different in that it is 2R. “Special Figure I” is a small hit symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “small hit”), and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Also, “Special Figure J” is the off symbol 1, “Special Figure K” is the off symbol 2, and “Special L” is the off symbol 3, both of which are the profits to be given to the player. Is a symbol that has a relatively small profit amount.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  When the 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal variation, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation A, 2R probability variation B, or 2R normal variation is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) arranged in a row is stopped and displayed. Further, when reporting 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 4R probability variation A, 4R probability variation B, 2R probability variation B, or 2R probability variation A or 2R probability variation B, three odd odd decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combinations (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the small hit, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying, the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stops symbol combinations other than.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, the stoppage display mode of the common figure is “common figure A” which is a winning symbol 1 (hereinafter also referred to as “1” per universal symbol) and a winning symbol 2 (hereinafter also referred to as “2 per universal symbol”). There are three types: “general map B” and “general map C”, which is an outlier design. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the usual figure variable game, the "usual figure A" or "common figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the usual figure variable game, the "normal figure C" is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Data table of main control unit>
Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Win / fail judgment table>
FIG. 6 (a) shows an example of the high probability state table for success / failure determination (Special Figure 1), and FIG. 6 (b) shows an example of the low probability state table for success / failure determination (Special Figure 1). Is. FIG. 4C shows an example of the high probability state table for success / failure determination (special figure 2), and FIG. 4D shows an example of the low probability state table for the success / failure determination (special figure 2). It is shown.

  These success / failure determination tables correlate presence / absence of special figure probability change (special figure high probability state or special figure low probability state), special figure big hit judgment lottery value data, and special figure variable game success / failure results. Has been remembered. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the winning / non-winning determination table, presence / absence of special figure probability change, and that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232). Based on the special figure winning random number value acquired when the ball detection sensor detects, a big hit determination is performed to determine the success / failure result of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game).

<Win / fail judgment table / special figure 1 variable game jackpot judgment>
In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 1 variable game winning (big hit) ) Is set and information indicating that a big hit flag is provided in the storage area for the big hit flag provided in the RAM 308 (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is set to “turn on the big hit flag on”) "). Further, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), when the obtained special figure winning random number value is 12186-12373, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the storage area for the small hit flag is set (hereinafter, setting the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag to ON”).

  On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), if the acquired special figure winning random number value is a numerical value of 0-10000 or 11858-65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of the above-mentioned range. Information indicating that there is a loss is set in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag. The setting of the out-of-order information in the storage area for the small hit flag is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”). Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 10220-12185, it is determined whether the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state. When the special figure low probability state is set, the off flag is set to ON (this result may be referred to as “high accuracy time big hit low accuracy loss”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219) + 10220-12185 (the size of the numerical range is 1966), so the probability of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). Since the numerical range of the lottery value data per small lot in the special figure high probability state is 12186 to 12373 (the numerical range is 188), the winning of the small hit per special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state The probability is about 1/399 (= 188/65536). On the other hand, the probability of winning the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536). This is approximately 1/399 (= 188/65536), which is the same as the winning probability per unit of the special figure variable game in the special figure high probability state.

<Win / fail judgment table / special figure 2 variable game jackpot judgment>
In the special figure 2 variable game jackpot determination, for example, when the special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219 in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability changing), the special figure 2 variable game winning (big hit) ) And the big hit flag is set to ON. The special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit. Also, in the special figure high probability state (with special figure probability variation), if the acquired special figure winning random number value is a value of 0 to 10000 or 12185 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure variable game is out of play and the jackpot flag And set the small hit flag off. Further, when the acquired special figure winning random number is a numerical value of 10220-12185, it is determined whether the special figure high probability state or the special figure low probability state. When it is set and the special figure low probability state is set, the off flag is set to ON (this result may be referred to as “high accuracy time big hit low accuracy time loss”).

  In this embodiment, the numerical value range that the special figure winning random number value can take is 0 to 65535 (the numerical value range is 65536), and the numerical value range of the jackpot lottery value data in the special figure high probability state is 10001 to 10219 (numeric value range). Is 219) + 10220-12185 (the numerical range is 1966), so the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure high probability state is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536). It is set to be the same as the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure high probability state. On the other hand, the winning probability of the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game in the special figure low probability state is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), They are set the same.

<Special figure determination table>
FIG. 7A is an example of a special figure determination table used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, and FIG. 7B is a special figure used when determining the stop symbol of special figure 2. It is an example of the table for determination. In these special figure determination tables, the success / failure determination result (win / failure result) of special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game), lottery value data, and types of stop symbols are stored in association with each other. Yes.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol 1 stop symbol (or the special symbol 2 stop symbol) based on the special symbol determination determination table and the acquired symbol random number value. Do. When the big hit flag is on, the big hit symbol random number value generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used as the symbol lottery random value, and when the big hit flag is on, the above special figure winning random number is used. When the small-hit symbol random number value generated from the random number value is used as the random lottery value for symbol lottery, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are off), the above-mentioned special The symbol random number value for loss generated from the symbol winning random value is used as the symbol random number value.

<Special figure determination table / Special figure 1 stop symbol>
For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value from 0 to 24, the special figure A is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery random value is 25 If it is a value of ~ 49, select special figure B as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and if the random number value of symbol lottery is 50-74, select special figure C as the special symbol 1 stop symbol, When the random number is a numerical value of 75 to 84, special figure D is selected as the special figure 1 stop symbol, and when the random number value of the symbol lottery is 85 to 99, special figure F is selected as the special symbol 1 stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 floating game is successful is a small hit, the special figure 1 is stopped regardless of the symbol random number value (the symbol random value for small hit), that is, with a probability of 100% at the small hit. When Special Figure I is selected as the symbol, and the result of determining whether or not Special Figure 1 Floating Game is correct, the special drawing J is selected as the Special Figure 1 stop symbol when the symbol lottery random number is a value from 0 to 49. When the symbol lottery random value is a value of 51 to 89, the special symbol K is selected as the special symbol 1 stop symbol, and when the symbol lottery random value is the numerical value of 90 to 99, the symbol special symbol 1 is stopped. Select FIG.

<Special Figure Determination Table / Special Figure 2 Stop Pattern>
For example, when the success / failure determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, if the symbol lottery random value is a value from 0 to 49, the special symbol A is selected as the special symbol 2 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery random value is 50 If it is a value of ~ 62, special figure E is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol, and if the random number value of symbol lottery is 63-74, special figure G is selected as the special symbol 2 stop symbol, and the symbol lottery When the random number is a numerical value of 75 to 99, the special figure H is selected as the special figure 2 stop symbol. In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful, the special figure 2 stop symbol is used regardless of the symbol lottery random value (the symbol random value for loss), that is, with a probability of 100% at the time of loss. Select Special Figure J.

<Variable prize opening abnormality judgment value table>
FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a variable prize opening abnormality determination value table for determining abnormality of the number of balls entered into the first variable prize opening 234 and the second variable prize opening 235. In this variable prize opening abnormality determination value table, a special figure hit type (synonymous with a stop symbol), a variable winning opening opening pattern, a variable winning opening to be opened, and an abnormality determination value for a variable winning opening. The number of abnormality determinations shown is stored in association with each other. Note that a calculation formula for calculating the number of abnormality determinations is shown on the right side of the number of abnormality determinations for reference.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires an abnormality determination value for a variable winning opening used in a winning opening counter updating process to be described later, based on the variable winning opening abnormality determination table and the winning type. For example, when the winning type is 16R probability variation A (special figure A), 208 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening, and when the winning type is 16R probability variation B (special figure B), the variable prize is obtained. 112 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the mouth, and 100 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the variable winning opening when the hit type is 16R normal.

  In the present embodiment, when the hit type is 16R probability variation A (special drawing A), a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. A game whose end condition is either when it has elapsed, or when a predetermined maximum number of balls (10 in this example) has entered since the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 has been opened. Is configured to perform a big hit game in which 1 to 16R is performed a total of 16 times. Therefore, for example, if the maximum number of balls for each of 1 to 16R (maximum opening time 30 seconds) is set to 10 balls and the abnormality determining constant per 1R is set to 3, the second variable prize opening for each of 1 to 16R Since the upper limit value of game balls that can enter 235 is (10 + 3), the lower limit value for determining that the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game of 16R probability variation A is abnormal. (10 + 3) × 16 = 208.

  In addition, when the hit type is 16R probability variation B (special drawing B), when a predetermined maximum opening time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened. Or, when the predetermined maximum number of balls entered (10 in this example) has entered after opening the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235, a game with one of the end conditions as 1 to After a total of four times of 4R, when a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 was opened, or the second variable winning prize When the predetermined maximum number of balls entered (2 in this example) after the door member 235a of the mouth 235 is opened, a big hit is performed for a total of 12 games of 5 to 16R. It is configured to play a game. Therefore, for example, the maximum number of entrances for each of 1 to 4R (maximum opening time 30 seconds) is 10, and the maximum number of entrances for each of 5 to 16R (maximum opening time 0.1 seconds) is 2 per 1R. When the abnormality determination constant is set to 3, the upper limit value of the game balls that can enter the second variable winning opening 235 in each of 1 to 4R is (10 + 3), and the second variable in each of 5 to 16R. Since the upper limit value of game balls that can enter the winning opening 235 is (2 + 3), the lower limit for determining that the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game of 16R probability variation B is abnormal. The value is (10 + 3) × 4 + (2 + 3) × 12 = 112.

  When the hit type is 16R normal, when a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 was opened, or the first variable When a predetermined maximum number of balls entered (10 in this example) is entered after the door member 234a of the winning opening 234 is opened, a game with any one of the finishing conditions as 1 to 4R is performed four times in total. After a predetermined maximum opening time (in this example, 0.1 second) has elapsed since the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 was opened, or the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 When a predetermined maximum number of balls entered (2 in this example) after entering the game, the game is played with a big hit game in which any one of 5 to 16R is played a total of 12 times. Has been. Thus, for example, the maximum number of entrances for each of 1 to 4R (maximum opening time 30 seconds) is 10, and the maximum number of entrances for each of 5 to 16R (maximum opening time 0.1 seconds) is 1 per 1R. When the abnormality determination constant is set to 3, the upper limit value of the game balls that can enter the first variable winning opening 234 in each of 1 to 4R is (10 + 3), and the first variable in each of 5 to 16R Since the upper limit value of game balls that can enter the winning opening 234 is (1 + 3), the lower limit value for determining that the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 during the 16R normal big hit game is abnormal. Becomes (10 + 3) × 4 + (1 + 3) × 12 = 100. Since the other hit types differ only in the number of rounds, detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the first variable winning opening 234 is arranged at a position where the game ball is harder to enter than the second variable winning opening 235 (below the central portion of the game board 200). The maximum number of game balls that can enter the first variable winning opening 234 in a round of 1 second is set to one less than two of the second variable winning opening 235. In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) has reached a predetermined maximum number of balls (10), Even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235) is forcibly closed.

<Special figure start port abnormality judgment value table>
FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of an abnormality determination value table for a special figure starting port for performing an abnormality determination on the number of balls entering the second special figure starting port 232. In this special figure starting port abnormality determination value table, the hit type of the normal map, the opening pattern of the second starting port 232, and the abnormality determination value indicating the number of abnormality determinations for the special figure starting port are stored in association with each other. Has been. Note that a calculation formula for calculating the number of abnormality determinations is shown on the right side of the number of abnormality determinations for reference.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires an abnormality determination value for a special figure starting port used in a prize opening counter updating process to be described later, based on the special figure starting port abnormality determination table and the hit type. For example, when the hit type is 1 per normal map, 12 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the start port, and when the hit type is 2 per normal map, 12 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the start port. To do.

  Here, when the hit type is 1 per normal figure, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened and closed once with a maximum opening time of 0.9 seconds, and the hit type is 2 per normal figure. Is configured to open and close the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 three times with a maximum opening time of 1.7 seconds. Also, in this embodiment, when it is detected that the number of game balls that have entered the second special figure starting port 232 has reached the maximum number of winnings (eight), the feathers obtained by winning one regular figure variable game Even before the opening / closing operation of the member 232a is completed, the blade member 232a is forcibly closed. Therefore, for example, if the abnormality determining constant for the opening / closing operation of the blade member 232a due to the winning of the one-time variable game is set to 3, the opening / closing operation of the blade member 232a due to the winning of the one-time variable game is input. The lower limit value for determining that the number of game balls played is abnormal is (8 + 4).

<Table selection table>
FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an example of a table selection table for determining a variation type determination table, which will be described later, and FIG. 9B shows a table selection opportunity table for determining No in the table selection table. It is the figure which showed an example. In the table selection table shown in FIG. 11A, No, a change type determination table, a production mode, the number of changes, and a transfer destination No are stored in association with each other, and the table selection shown in FIG. In the opportunity table, a table selection opportunity and No in the table selection table are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300, in the main control unit main process and the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, when the table selection opportunity shown in FIG. To get. For example, when power-on to the pachinko machine 100 is detected, No0 is acquired, and the special symbol F, special symbol H, or special symbol I is selected in the above-described symbol lottery, When the game (big hit game or small hit game) is finished, No1 is acquired and the special drawing A, special figure B, special figure C, special figure D, special figure E, special figure G are obtained by the above-mentioned symbol lottery. If any one is won and the winning game based on the special figure (big hit game) is completed, No5 is acquired. Next, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 acquires the variation type determination table, the rendering mode, the number of variations, and the transition destination No based on the table selection table and the No acquired based on the table selection trigger table.

<Table selection table / No0>
For example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No0, that is, when the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, Table 1 is used as the variation type determination table, Mode A (the mode) is used as the production mode, and the number of changes No0 is acquired as the migration destination number 30 times.

  In this case, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the effect mode to mode A, performs a variation type lottery described later based on Table 1, and displays the special drawing according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing the floating game 30 times, the process shifts to No0 indicated by the transfer destination No. In this example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No0, that is, when the power-on of the pachinko machine 100 is a table selection opportunity, the production mode is mode A (donor mode). The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to repeat the state, but the first sub-control unit 400 changes the rendering mode from mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode) → mode C (爺 mode) → mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode)... May be switched, and mode A (dono mode), mode B (princess mode), and mode C (claw mode) may be repeated in this order.

<Table selection table / No1>
In addition, for example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No1, that is, in the above-described symbol lottery, either special figure F, special figure H or special figure I will be won, and based on the special figure When the game (big hit game or small hit game) is finished, table 1 is used as the variation type determination table, mode A (donor mode) is used as the production mode, 30 times is used as the number of changes, and No2 is set as the transition destination number. get.

  In this case, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the effect mode to mode A, performs a variation type lottery described later based on Table 1, and displays the special drawing according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing the variable game 30 times, the process proceeds to No 2 indicated by the transfer destination No. When the transition to No. 2 is made, the production mode is set to mode B, and the variation type lottery described later is performed based on Table 2, and the special game variation game is performed 30 times according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing, it transfers to No3 which transfer destination No shows. In the case of shifting to No3, the production mode is set to mode A, and the variation type lottery described later is performed based on Table 1, and the special variation game is performed 30 times according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing, it transfers to No4 which transfer destination No shows. In the case of shifting to No4, the production mode is set to mode C, and the variation type lottery described later is performed based on Table 3, and the special variation game is performed 30 times according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing, it transfers to No1 which transfer destination No shows.

  Therefore, the table selection trigger is that one of the special figure F, special figure H, and special figure I is won in the above-described symbol lottery and the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the special figure is completed. In this case, the production mode is: mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode) → mode A (dono mode) → mode C (Ｃ mode) → mode A (dono mode) → mode B (princess mode) Switch to mode A (dono mode) → mode C (爺 mode) ... and change mode A (dono mode), mode B (princess mode), mode A (dono mode), mode C (爺 mode) Repeat in this order.

<Table selection table / No5>
In addition, for example, when No acquired based on the table selection opportunity table is No5, that is, the special drawing A, special drawing B, special drawing C, special drawing D, special drawing E, special drawing G in the above-described symbol lottery. When one of the winning games is won and the winning game based on the special figure (big hit game) is finished, the table 4 is set as the change type determination table, the mode D (electric support effect mode) is set as the change mode, and the change count is set as 100. No1 is acquired as the migration destination number.

  In this case, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the effect mode to mode D, performs a variation type lottery described later based on the table 4, and displays the special drawing according to the variation type determined in the variation type lottery. After performing the variable game 100 times, the process shifts to No1 indicated by the transfer destination No. After transitioning to No.1, the winner of the special symbol F, special symbol H, or special symbol I was won in the above-mentioned symbol lottery, and the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) based on the special figure was completed. As in the case of the table selection opportunity, mode A (dono mode), mode B (princess mode), mode A (dono mode), and mode C (coffin mode) are repeated in this order.

<Variation type A determination table>
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a variation type A determination table for determining the variation type A. In this variation type A determination table, the stop symbol of the special figure, the random number range for determining the variation type A, and the content of the variation type A are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines the variation type A determination table, the special symbol stop symbol determined by the symbol lottery described above, the special figure 1 variable game hold number, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number. A variation type A lottery for determining the content of the variation type A is performed based on the total and the obtained random number for determining the variation type A. For example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 determined by the above-described symbol lottery is the special figure J, and the total number of the special figure 1 variable game hold and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 1 (for example, the special figure 1 variable game When the number of holdings is 0 and the holding number of the special figure 2 variable game is 1), when the obtained random number for determining the changing type A is in the numerical range of 0 to 29931, the changing type 3 is selected as the changing type. .

  Further, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 determined by the above-described symbol lottery is the special figure K, and the total number of the special figure 1 variable game hold and the special figure 2 variable game hold is 7 (for example, the special figure 1 change) In the case where the number of held games is 4 and the number of held special games 2 is 3), when the obtained variation type A determination random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 9999, the variation type 1 is set as the variation type. select. Also, for example, if the stop symbol of special figure 1 determined in the above-mentioned symbol lottery is special figure A, it is acquired regardless of the total number of special figure 1 variable games and special figure 2 variable games held. When the random number for determining the variation type A is in the numerical range of 0 to 3919, the variation type 8 is selected as the variation type.

<Variation type B determination table>
FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type B determination table for determining the variation type B. In this variation type B determination table, the random number range for determining the variation type B defined for each variation type determination table and the contents of the variation type B are stored in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation type (for example, any one of the variation types 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10) as the variation type A by the variation type A lottery described above. In addition, the variation type B lottery for determining the content of the variation type B is performed based on the variation type B determination table, the current variation type determination table (tables 1 to 4), and the obtained random number for determining the variation type B. . If a variation type other than a specific variation type is selected as variation type A by the variation type A lottery described above, a variation type B (for example, variation) is selected without variation type B lottery. Type 101) is selected.

  Of the variation types B in the variation type B determination table, the variation type 101 has no pseudo-series, the variation type 102 has one pseudo-series and 5 seconds of special figure variation, and the variation type 103 has two pseudo-series. This means that the special figure fluctuation display for 10 seconds is performed. Here, “pseudo” refers to a pseudo variation (so-called “pseudo”) that makes it appear that a symbol combination corresponding to a deviation is stopped and displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208 a plurality of times during one special symbol variation display. Ream ”),“ pseudo-ream 1 time ”means to perform one pseudo-variation during the display of the fluctuation of one special figure, and“ pseudo-ream 2 times ” This is to perform two pseudo fluctuations during the special figure fluctuation display.

  For example, when the variation type determination table is table 1 (= mode A (donor mode)), the variation type 101 is set as the variation type when the obtained variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 21844. When the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 21845-43689, the variation type 102 is selected as the variation type, and when the variation type B determination random number value is in the range of 43690-65535, the variation type The variation type 103 is selected as the type. In the case of mode A (donor mode), the probability that the variation type 101 is selected is 21845/65536, the probability that the variation type 102 is selected is 21845/65536, and the probability that the variation type 103 is selected is 21845 / 65536 and the three probabilities are almost identical.

  When the variation type determination table is Table 2 (= mode B (Ｂ mode)), the variation type 101 is set as the variation type when the obtained random number for variation type B determination is in the numerical range of 0 to 6552. When the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 6553 to 39319, the variation type 102 is selected as the variation type, and when the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 39320 to 65535, the variation The variation type 103 is selected as the type. In the case of mode B (爺 mode), the probability that the variation type 101 is selected is 6553/65536, the probability that the variation type 102 is selected is 32768/65536, and the probability that the variation type 103 is selected is 26214 / 65536, which is easier to connect in a pseudo manner than mode A (dono mode).

  When the variation type determination table is table 3 (= mode C (princess mode)), the variation type 101 is set as the variation type when the obtained variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 0 to 52429. When the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 52430 to 58982, the variation type 102 is selected as the variation type, and when the variation type B determination random number value is in the numerical range of 58983 to 65535, the variation type is selected. The variation type 103 is selected as the type. In the case of mode C (princess mode), the probability that the variation type 101 is selected is 52430/65536, the probability that the variation type 102 is selected is 6553/65536, and the probability that the variation type 103 is selected is 6553 / 65536, which is less likely to be pseudo-connected than mode A (dono mode).

<Timer number determination table>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a timer number determination table for determining a timer number. In this timer number determination table, variation type A, variation type B, timer number, and variation time are stored in association with each other. In addition, on the right side of the variation time, the type of effect corresponding to the variation time is described for reference.

  Based on the timer number determination table, the variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery, and the variation type B selected by the above variation type B lottery, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 A lottery for timer numbers is determined. For example, if the variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery is variation type 1, and the variation type B selected by the above variation type B lottery is variation type 101, timer 1 (variation) When the variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery is the variation type 2 and the variation type B selected by the above variation type B lottery is the variation type 101 Selects timer 2 (variation time 3000 ms, shortened variation) as the timer number, variation type A selected by the above variation type A lottery is variation type 3, and variation type selected by the above variation type B lottery When B is the variation type 101, timer 3 (variation time 5000 ms, short variation) is selected as the timer number.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed. In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before power interruption). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the first variable winning port 234, the second variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232 It is determined that there has been a ball entry or a normal start port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter updating processing (details will be described later) is performed. In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. To do. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. (Special figure winning random number value used for jackpot determination in special figure 1), obtaining a lottery value for symbol lottery as a random figure value for lottery figure per special figure, and It is acquired as a numerical value, a random number value for determining variation type A is acquired as random number value 1 for special figure 1 variable time lottery, and a random number value for determining variation type B is acquired as random number value 2 for special figure 1 variable time lottery. These random number values are stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (refer to FIG. 16A) provided in the RAM 308 in association with the current number of reservations in the special figure 1 and then prefetched (details). Will be described later.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random value (special figure winning random value used for jackpot determination in special figure 2), obtaining a symbol lottery random value as a symbol lottery random value per special figure 2, Random number value for determining variation type A is acquired as random number value 1 for special figure 2 variable time lottery, and random number value for determining variable type A is acquired as random number value 1 for special figure 2 variable time lottery. Then, the random number value for determining the variation type B is acquired as the random number value 2 for the special figure 2 variable time lottery. These random numbers are stored in the special information start information storage area (see FIG. 16A) provided in the RAM 308 in association with the current number of reservations in FIG. Will be described later.

  Further, when a winning is made at the usual figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a usual figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the usual figure winning random number value. And stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. In addition, when a winning is made to the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235, a ball is placed in the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. Stores information indicating that a ball has been entered.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).
In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure A shown in FIG. ~ Confirmed display of any one of the special figures L. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 is detected until a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, the maximum count number) is detected in the second variable prize opening 235 (see FIG. 1 is the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the door member 235a (the door member 234a in FIG. 1) in an open state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the first variable prize winning opening 234. The information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a) is provided to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 235a of the second variable prize opening 235 (the special figure 1 is the door member 234a of the first variable prize opening 234). A signal for holding the closed state is output, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times, the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). In order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player of the image is displayed, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, the number of hours (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the jackpot game. Turn on the short time flag. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the second number of game balls before the predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 or the second variable winning port 235 during the jackpot game. To solve this, there is a problem that many game balls enter the special figure starting port 232 and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. It is.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. is included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234 (or Including the presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit described above.

<Winning mouth counter update process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the winning prize counter updating process (step S215) in the above-described main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a winning opening counter update process.

  In step S301, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, any of the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, and the general figure starting opening 228 is selected. When there is a crab winning, the value of the winning number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is read into the RAM 308, 1 is added, and the original winning number storage area is set.

  In step S302, whether or not the number of winnings in the general winning opening 226 is smaller than the predetermined general winning opening winning number comparison data (in this embodiment, the number of winnings per unit time (for example, 1 minute) is the prescribed number ( For example, if it is smaller than 15), the process proceeds to step S303 if applicable, and proceeds to step S306 if not applicable (when abnormality is detected). In step S303, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings in the second special figure starting port 232 is smaller than the abnormality determination value for the special figure starting port acquired using the above-described special figure starting port abnormality determination value table, If applicable, the process proceeds to step S304, and if not applicable (when an abnormality is detected), the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S304, an abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening is acquired based on the variable prize opening abnormality determination table and the hit type. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings in the first variable winning port 234 (or the second variable winning port 235) is smaller than the abnormality determination value for the variable winning port acquired in step S304. If not, the process ends. If not applicable (when an abnormality is detected), the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S306, a winning abnormality handling process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this prize abnormality handling process, a setting for outputting an abnormality detection signal indicating that a prize abnormality has occurred outside the pachinko machine 100 (eg, hall computer) for a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds). I do. Although the abnormality detection signal is output in the external output signal setting process (step S235), the abnormality detection signal may be output in step S306. Also, predetermined notification means (for example, a lamp, a speaker, various display devices, various movable objects (second special figure starting port 232, first variable winning port 234, second variable winning port) controlled by the main control unit 300. 235)))) may be notified, and notification (light output, sound output, image or character display, movement or rotation of movable objects) by predetermined notification means is interrupted or terminated. By doing so, you may make it alert | report the generation | occurrence | production of winning abnormality. In addition, setting for outputting a signal notifying the first sub-control unit 400 that a winning abnormality has occurred may be performed, or processing for outputting the signal may be performed.

<Prefetch process>
Next, referring to FIG. 15, the prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) in the above-described main control unit timer interruption process will be described. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of prefetching processing.

  In step S401, the start information of the special figure 2 (in this embodiment, the special figure 2 winning random number value) is obtained based on the detection of the predetermined ball detection sensor that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232. It is determined whether or not the number has increased. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S402, pre-reading is performed with reference to the starting information increased by winning the second special figure starting port 232. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned jackpot determination, symbol lottery, variation type A lottery, variation type B lottery, timer number lottery are performed, and the success / failure type information determined by these lotteries, the winning symbol type, the off symbol type, and the variation type A (variation type determined by variation type A lottery) is prefetched (acquired) as prefetch information.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the contents of the prefetch information. As the success / failure type of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2), the “out of”, “big hit”, “high precision time big hit low probability time deviation”, “small hit (special figure I) explained with reference to FIG. In addition to the four types of " Further, the hit symbol type of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) includes 16R probability variation A (special diagram A), 16R probability variation B (special diagram B), and 16R normal described with reference to FIG. (Special Figure C) 4R Probability A (Special Figure D), 4R Probability B (Special Figure E), 2R Probability A (Special Figure F), 2R Probability Change B (Special Figure G), 2R Normal (Special Figure H) In addition to the eight types, there is “undecided” indicating that the symbol lottery has not ended.

  In addition, the special symbol 1 (or special Fig. 2) includes the detachment symbol type described above with reference to FIG. In addition to the three types of FIG. L), there is “Undetermined” indicating that the symbol lottery has not ended. In addition, the variation type A of the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) indicates that the variation type A lottery has not been completed in addition to the 22 types of fluctuation types 1 to 22 described with reference to FIG. There is “Undetermined”.

  Returning to FIG. 15, in step S403, the prefetch information prefetched in step S402 and the current special figure 2 variable game hold count are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch information storage area provided in the RAM 308 (see FIG. 16B). ). In this example, when the start information of special figure 2 increases, it is configured to read ahead unconditionally. For example, in the non-electric support state, the start information of special figure 2 is Without reference, information indicating “undecided” may be stored in the pre-read information storage area for special figure 2 (that is, processing corresponding to steps S405 and S408 described later may be applied to special figure 2). ). Also, in step S403, preparation is made to transmit the prefetch information stored in the special figure 2 prefetch information storage area shown in FIG. 16B to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command.

  In step S404, the start information of the special figure 1 (in this embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number value) is obtained based on the detection of the predetermined ball detection sensor that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230. It is determined whether or not the number has increased. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S405, and if not, the process ends. In step S405, it is determined whether or not power support is in progress. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S406, the above-described prefetching is performed with reference to the starting information increased by winning the first special figure starting port 230. In step S407, the prefetched information prefetched in step S406 and the current special figure 1 variable game hold count are stored in the special figure 1 prefetched information storage area (see FIG. 16B) provided in the RAM 308. In addition, preparation is made to transmit the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. In step S408, without referring to the start information in FIG. 1, the information indicating “undecided” is stored in the pre-read information storage area for special figure 1, and the process is terminated.

<Hold increase command>
FIGS. 18A to 18D are diagrams illustrating an example of a pending increase command transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 after pre-reading by winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In FIG. 6A, the number of suspensions of special figure 1 variable game is 3, and as a result of the jackpot determination of special figure 1 by prefetching, the big hit is stored in the prefetched information storage area for special figure 1 as the success / failure type information of special figure 1 As a result of symbol lottery by prefetching, 16R probability variation A is stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 as a winning symbol type, and as a result of variation type A lottery by prefetching, variation type 18 is special symbol 1 It is the example memorize | stored in the prefetch information storage area. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area, since the variation type A is the variation type 18, the pseudo-continuous twice + super reach It can be grasped that it is A (big hit).

  FIG. 4B shows that the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is 2, and as a result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 by the prefetching, as the success / failure type information of the special figure 1, the outage is the prefetched information storage area for the special figure 1 As a result of symbol lottery by prefetching, the outlier 3 is stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 as the outlier symbol type, and as a result of variation type A lottery by prefetching, variation type 6 is the special symbol. It is an example stored in the prefetch information storage area for 1. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area indicates that the variation type A is the variation type 6 and therefore is a normal reach. Can be grasped.

  FIG. 4C shows that the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 1, and as a result of the big hit determination of special figure 1 by prefetching, the small hit is special figure 1 prefetch information storage area as the success / failure type information of special figure 1 As a result of the variation type A lottery by prefetching, the variation type 10 is stored as the variation type A in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area has a long reach (small hit) since the variation type A is the variation type 10. I can understand that there is.

  FIG. 4D shows that the number of suspensions of the special figure 1 variable game is 4, and as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 by the prefetching, as the success / failure type information of the special figure 1, the high accuracy time big hit low deviation time special figure is specially shown. As a result of symbol lottery by prefetching, 16R probability variation A as a winning symbol type is stored in the prefetching information storage region for special figure 1, and outage 2 is stored in the prefetching information storage region for special figure 1 as a result of prefetching. As a result of the variation type A lottery, the variation type 15 is stored in the prefetch information storage area for special figure 1 as the variation type A. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pending increase command including the prefetch information stored in the special chart 1 prefetch information storage area, since the variation type A is the variation type 15, the pseudo-continuous once + super reach In addition to being able to grasp A (big hit), in the special figure low probability state, it is possible to perform a notice effect based on the off symbol type = out of 2. In the present embodiment, the hold increase command shown in FIG. 4D is transmitted only when the high probability time big hit is stored as the success / failure type information in FIG. However, this command only when the low-accuracy time deviation is stored as the success / failure type information in FIG. 1 or when either the high-accuracy time big hit or the low-accuracy time deviation is stored as the success / failure type information in FIG. May be configured to transmit.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S501 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S507, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In step S509, an effect control process is performed. Although details will be described later, in this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S507, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data needs to be updated. In such a case, the effect data is updated.

  If it is detected in step S511 that the chance button has been pressed, the effect data updated in step S509 is changed to effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S513, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S515, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S517, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S519, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S521, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S503.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S701 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S703 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S519, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S513 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S801, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S803, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. Otherwise, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S807, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S809, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S611. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production control processing>
Next, the effect control process (step S509) in the first sub control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of an effect control process.

  In step S901, a hold icon display control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S902, a variable icon display control process (details will be described later). In step S903, a winning notification control process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S904, after other effect control processes are performed, the process ends.

<Production control process / hold icon display control process>
Next, the hold icon display control process (step S901) in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the hold icon display control process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of special figure variable games has increased (whether or not a hold increase command has been received from the main control unit 300). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, Then, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1002, a hold icon change scenario lottery process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the display mode of the hold icon according to the scenario, etc.) is performed. Store in the storage area. In step S <b> 1004, processing such as reading effect data of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold from the ROM 406 is performed. As a result, the hold icon image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the VDP 434.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the hold icon change condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, whether or not the special map variable display start condition is satisfied in a state where the special figure is held). If YES in step S1006, the process advances to step S1006; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007. In step S1006, a hold icon change process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the display mode of the hold icon according to a scenario, etc.) is performed. In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if not, the process ends. In step S1008, after the hold icon display position change process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the hold icon display position), the process ends.

<Production control processing / variable icon display control processing>
Next, the variation icon display control process (step S902) in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the change icon display control process.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the start condition of the special figure variation display is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1102, a variation icon lottery process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S11003, a variation icon effect data corresponding to the lottery result in step S1102 is read from the ROM 406. As a result, the image of the variation icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 via the VDP 434.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation display is in progress. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process ends. In step S1105, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not a power interruption has occurred). If not, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1106, after a variable icon display interruption process (details will be described later, for example, a process of deleting the variable icon, etc.), the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display is being interrupted. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display resumption condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not the power has been restored). If not, the process proceeds to step S1112. In step S1109, after a variable icon display restart process (details will be described later, for example, a process of displaying the variable icon again), the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the change icon change condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not the special figure change is stopped). If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1111. If not, the process proceeds to step S1112. In step S1111, the process proceeds to step S1112 after performing a change icon change process (details will be described later, for example, a process of changing the display mode of the change icon).

  In step S1112, it is determined whether or not the change icon change end condition is satisfied (details will be described later, for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after stopping the change of the special figure). In step S1113, if not established, the process ends. In step S1113, the process proceeds to step S1112 after performing a change icon display end process (details will be described later, for example, a process of performing an erase animation for deleting the change icon).

<Production control process / winning notification control process>
Next, the winning notification control process (step S903) in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a prize alerting | reporting control process.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether or not a winning notification condition is satisfied. If satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not, the process ends. In step S1202, after the winning notification process is performed, the process ends.

  Here, when the winning notification condition of step S1201 is satisfied, for example, (A1) When there is a ball exceeding the maximum number of balls stipulated as the end condition of one round (for example, the end of the first round) When the maximum number of balls specified as a condition is 10 and the number of balls in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) in the first round exceeds 10), (A2) When there is a ball exceeding the maximum number of balls specified for each round as the end condition of the round (for example, the maximum number of balls specified as the end condition of the first to seventh rounds is 10 and 8 to 15 The maximum number of balls specified as the end condition of the round is 11, and the number of balls in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) in the first and third rounds exceeds 10 Case), ( 3) The condition (A1) or (A2) is satisfied, and the effective period (for example, 30 seconds) for which the entrance sensors of the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 detect entering has passed. The case includes (A4) a case where a plurality or all of the conditions (A1) to (A3) are satisfied.

  The winning notification process performed in step S1202 includes (B1) notification performed every time the number of balls entered exceeds a predetermined number (for example, notification when there is a ball exceeding the predetermined number in the first round), (B2 ) Notification to be performed when the number of entrances exceeds a predetermined number in a plurality of rounds (for example, notification when there are more than a predetermined number in both the first round and the third round), (B3) (B1 ) Or (B2), and includes a pre-read notification within the hold, and (B4) includes a plurality or all of the notifications (B1) to (B3).

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S1301 in FIG. 10A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S1301. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S1307, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. In step S1309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 1307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.

  In step S1311, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S1313, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S1303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S1501 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1303 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S1303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1503 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

<Pending icon change scenario lottery process>
Next, the hold icon change scenario lottery process executed in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process described above will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table. In the hold icon display mode lottery table, the display mode of the hold icon, the lottery value defined for each variation type A, and the lottery value defined for each off-score type are stored in association with each other. Yes. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 includes the hold icon display mode lottery table, the prefetch information included in the hold increase command received from the main control unit 300, and the acquired first lottery value and second lottery value. Based on the above, a hold icon change scenario lottery for determining the display mode of the hold icon is performed. In the case of the special figure low probability state and the success / failure type information included in the pre-reading information is out of the high-accuracy big hit / low-probability time, the lost symbol type included in the pre-reading information, the acquired first lottery value, and A holding icon change scenario lottery is performed based on the second lottery value, and otherwise, the holding icon change scenario lottery is determined based on the variation type A included in the prefetch information, the first lottery value, and the second lottery value. Do.

  For example, when the special figure low probability state and the winning / missing type information included in the prefetch information is a high probability time big hit and a low probability time deviation, and the outlier symbol type is a deviation 2, the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is When 0 to 49, the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and when the numerical range of the acquired lottery value is 50 to 59, the display mode of the hold icon When the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → umbrella” is selected, and the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 60-74, the display mode of the hold icon is “small → umbrella → umbrella → umbrella → umbrella”. When the obtained lottery value is in the range of 75 to 79, the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → umbrella → snow” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the following is shown in FIG. Street.

  In addition, for example, when the special figure low probability state and the success / failure type information included in the look-ahead information is other than the high-accuracy time big hit low-accuracy time deviation and the fluctuation type A is the fluctuation types 11 to 13, the acquired When the numerical value range of the lottery value is 0 to 29, the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and when the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 30 to 34 When the scenario of “sunny → sunny → sunny → sunny → umbrella” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 35 to 39, the display mode of the hold icon is “umbrella → umbrella → When the scenario of “Umbrella → Umbrella → Umbrella” is selected and the acquired lottery value is in the range of 40 to 44, select the scenario of “Har → Sunny → Sunny → Umbrella → Snow” as the display mode of the hold icon, The subsequent steps are as shown in FIG.

<Scenario>
Next, the scenario will be described. For example, the scenario “sunny → umbrella → snow → thunder → dedicated” is “sunny” when the change display of the special figure four times before the special figure corresponding to the hold is displayed. ”Is displayed, and the image corresponding to“ Clear ”is changed to the image corresponding to“ Umbrella ”at the time of fluctuation display of the special figure three times before the special figure corresponding to the hold. At the time of the fluctuation display of the special figure two times before the special figure corresponding to the hold, the image corresponding to the “umbrella” is changed to the image corresponding to the “snow”, and the special figure corresponding to the hold is displayed. Change the image corresponding to “Snow” to the image corresponding to “Thunder” when displaying the variation of the special figure immediately before the fluctuation display of “”, and change it to “Thunder” when displaying the fluctuation of the special figure corresponding to the hold. This shows that the corresponding image is changed to an image corresponding to “dedicated”.

<Icon>
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of icons displayed as hold icons 1 to 4 and variable icons described later.

  In this example, an image imitating the sun is associated as an image corresponding to “sunny”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that the degree of expectation of the profit given to the player is low. In addition, an image imitating an umbrella is associated as an image corresponding to “umbrella”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that the expectation of profits given to the player is medium . Further, an image simulating a snowman is associated as an image corresponding to “snow”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that the expectation of the profit given to the player is high. Further, an image imitating lightning is associated as an image corresponding to “lightning”, and the image is an icon for suggesting that a big hit has been confirmed. The icons corresponding to these “sunny”, “umbrella”, “snow”, and “thunder” are icons for suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot for holding.

  In addition, in this example, three types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared, and images corresponding to “dedicated 1” and “dedicated 2” are supported as an image corresponding to “dedicated 1”. An image with the characters “SP reach B” as an image to be associated with an image with characters “full rotation” as an image corresponding to “dedicated 3”. An image including the characters “SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 1” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 11 to 15 and 18. An image including the characters “SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 2” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 16-17 and 19-21. An image including the characters “full rotation” corresponding to “dedicated 3” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation type 22. The icons corresponding to these “dedicated 1”, “dedicated 2”, and “dedicated 3” are icons for suggesting at least a part (such as the type of reach) of the pending fluctuation content.

<Other examples of icons>
24B to 24D are diagrams showing other examples of icons. In the example shown in FIG. 6B, three types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared. As an image corresponding to “dedicated 4”, an image given the character “1” and “dedicated 5” are prepared. The image corresponding to “2” is associated with the image corresponding to “2”, and the image corresponding to “exclusive 6” is associated with the image corresponding to “3”. An image including the character “1” corresponding to “dedicated 4” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 12 and 15. An image including the character “2” corresponding to “dedicated 5” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 13, 17, 18, and 20. An image including the character “3” corresponding to “dedicated 6” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation type 21. The icons corresponding to “dedicated 4”, “dedicated 5”, and “dedicated 6” are icons for suggesting at least a part of the pending change contents (in this example, the number of pseudo-continuations).

  In the example shown in FIG. 5C, four types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared. As an image corresponding to “dedicated 7”, an image given “1 + SP reach A” and “ As an image corresponding to “Dedicated 8”, an image given the character “2 + SP reach A”, as an image corresponding to “Dedicated 9”, an image given the character “2 + SP reach B”, and “Dedicated 10” As the corresponding images, the images with the letters “3 + SP reach B” are associated with each other. An image including the characters “1 + SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 7” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 12 and 15. An image including the characters “2 + SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 8” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 13 and 18. An image including the characters “2 + SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 9” is an icon selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 17 and 20. An image including the characters “3 + SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 10” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation type 21. The icons corresponding to “exclusive 7” to “exclusive 10” are icons for suggesting at least a part of the pending change contents (in this example, the number of pseudo-continuations and the type of reach).

  In the example shown in FIG. 6D, two types of images corresponding to “dedicated” are prepared. As an image corresponding to “dedicated 11”, an image given the characters “0 + SP reach A” and “ As an image corresponding to “dedicated 12”, an image given the characters “0 + SP reach B” is associated with each other. An image including the characters “0 + SP reach A” corresponding to “dedicated 11” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 11 and 14. An image including the characters “0 + SP reach B” corresponding to “dedicated 12” is an icon that is selected only when the variation type A is the variation types 16 and 19. The icons corresponding to these “dedicated 11” and “dedicated 12” are icons for suggesting at least a part of the suspended variation contents (in this example, not pseudo-continuous).

<Special A map display area in Mode A (Tono Mode)>
FIG. 25A is a diagram for explaining the special figure hold display area when the effect mode is mode A (donor mode). As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 has three symbol display areas 208a to 208c (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c) for displaying decorative symbols. And an effect display area 208d for displaying images to be used. The decorative symbol variation display is performed within the display range of each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stop display of pseudo-continuous), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The decorative design is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of each display range.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a, the fourth symbol display area 208e for special figure 1 for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are displayed. It has a special symbol 2 fourth symbol display area 208f for suggesting the success / failure result, and a special symbol decorative symbol display region 208g for suggesting the success / failure result of the common figure variable game.

  In mode A (dono mode), the special figure hold display area 208h is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (display area not overlapping with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). The special figure hold display area 208h includes a first special figure hold display area 208h1 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 1 and a second special figure hold display area 208h2 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 2. And a third special figure hold display area 208h3 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 3, and a fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 for displaying the conventionally known hold image 4. It is configured so as to suggest the number of special figure variable games held (4 in this example) by conventionally known held images 1 to 4.

  Hereinafter, like this special figure hold display area 208h, a special figure hold display area for displaying only a conventionally known hold image (in this example, a circle image filled with a single color), or a pattern for displaying a decorative pattern A special figure hold display area that does not overlap the display area may be referred to as a “normal hold display area”.

<Special B pending display area in Mode B (Princess Mode)>
FIG. 25B is a diagram for explaining the special figure hold display area when the effect mode is mode B (princess mode). In mode B (princess mode), a special figure hold display area 208j is arranged in a display area overlapping with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure hold display area 208j displays a special figure changing display area 208j0 for displaying a change icon, a first special figure hold display area 208j1 for displaying the hold icon 1, and a hold icon 2. The second special figure hold display area 208j2, the third special figure hold display area 208j3 for displaying the hold icon 3, and the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 for displaying the hold icon 4. The hold icons 1 to 4 indicate the number of hold of the special figure variable game (4 in this example).

  Here, the hold icon 4 means that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 3, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port) during the special figure change. 232) is an icon displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 4 when a ball wins. Further, the hold icon 3 means that the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 2, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232 is in the special figure change state). ) Is an icon displayed in the third special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 3 when a ball wins.

  Further, the hold icon 2 means that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 1, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232 is in the special figure change state). ) Is an icon displayed in the second special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 2 when a ball wins. Further, the hold icon 1 means that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game (or special figure 2 variable game) is 0, and the special figure start port 230 (or the second special figure start port 232 is in the special figure change state). ) Is an icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area in order to notify that the number of holds is 1 when a ball wins. In addition, the fluctuation icon is displayed when the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games (or special figure 2 variable games) is 0 and the special figure non-fluctuation is 1st special figure start port 230 (or second special figure start port 232). This icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area when a ball is won.

  Hereinafter, as in the special figure hold display area 208j, a special figure hold display area for displaying at least one hold icon or a variation icon according to the present invention, or a special display area for displaying at least a part overlaps with a special symbol display area for displaying a decorative design. The figure hold display area may be referred to as a “special hold display area” with respect to the above “normal hold display area”.

  In this example, the four first special figure hold display areas 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 are arranged so that the display areas do not overlap each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, The display areas may be partially overlapped with each other, and part of the four first special figure hold display areas 208j1 to 4th special figure hold display areas 208j4 protrudes from the special figure hold display area 208j. May be. That is, it is only necessary to identify which display mode of the display mode illustrated in FIG. 24 is the hold image displayed in the special map hold display area 208j. In this example, a plurality of special figure hold display areas are arranged in the horizontal direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special figure hold display areas may be arranged vertically or obliquely. The arrangement direction is not particularly limited.

  In this example, the special figure hold display area is placed above the symbol display area, and the two are superimposed. However, the special figure hold display area is placed below the symbol display area. May be. In addition, at the first timing (for example, the timing at which the special symbol is changed and displayed in the symbol display area), the special symbol hold display area is set below (or above) the symbol display area so that both are superimposed. In the second timing (for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area), the special symbol hold display area is set above (or below) the symbol display area so that both are superimposed. Also good. In addition, the first part of the special figure hold display area (for example, the special figure changing display area) is placed above (or below) the symbol display area, and the two parts are overlapped, and the second part of the special figure hold display area (For example, the first special figure hold display area to the fourth special figure hold display area) may be configured to overlap each other under (or above) the symbol display area.

<Special drawing hold display area in mode C (爺 mode)>
FIG. 25 (c) is a diagram for explaining the special figure hold display area when the effect mode is mode C (爺 mode). In mode C (爺 mode), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h in mode A (dono mode) and a special figure hold display in mode B (princess mode). Both areas (special hold display areas) 208j are arranged. As shown well in the figure, the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is closer to the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c than the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. And the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is larger than the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. It is an area. The size of each of the four first special figure hold display areas 208j1 to fourth special figure hold display areas 208j4 constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is also set as the special figure hold display area. (Normal hold display area) Each of the four first special figure hold display areas 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 constituting the 208h is larger than each display area.

<Transition of production mode>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect mode, and FIG. 26A is an example when the effect mode transitions from mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode). (B) is the figure which showed an example at the time of production mode changing from mode B (princess mode) to mode A (dono mode).

  When the production mode is shifted from mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the mode (for example, white) to the background color for the princess mode (for example, white). For example, the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is deleted and the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is displayed. On the other hand, when the production mode is shifted from mode B (princess mode) to mode A (dono mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the princess mode (for example, pink) to the palace mode. While changing to a background color (for example, white), the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is deleted, and the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed.

  FIG. 6C shows an example in which the effect mode is changed from mode A (dono mode) to mode C (Ｃ mode), and FIG. It is the figure which showed an example at the time of transfering to (dono mode).

  When the effect mode is shifted from mode A (dono mode) to mode C (爺 mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the ornamental mode display (for example, white) to the background color for the eaves mode ( For example, the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is displayed without deleting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. On the other hand, when the effect mode is shifted from mode C (爺 mode) to mode A (dono mode), the background color of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed from the background color for the eaves mode (for example, brown) to the 殿 mode. While changing to a background color (for example, white), only the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is deleted, and only the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed.

<Modification of special hold display area>
Next, a modification of the above-described special hold display area will be described. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the first modification. In the first modification, the special hold display area 208j is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (a display area that does not overlap the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). Further, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is larger than the entire display area of the above-described special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. The size of each display area of the four display areas (the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4) constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208j is also set. The four display areas (the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4) constituting the figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h are larger than the display areas. ing.

  As described above, the special reserved display area is a display area that does not overlap the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and the entire display area is larger than the entire normal display area. Good.

  FIG. 6B is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the second modification. In the second modification, the special hold display area 208k is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (display area that does not overlap with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). Also, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208k is larger than the overall display area of the above-described special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. Of the five display areas (special figure changing display area 208k0, first special figure hold display area 208k1 to fourth special figure hold display area 208k4) constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208k. The size of one display area (special figure changing display area 208k0) is four display areas (first special figure hold display area 208h1 to fourth) constituting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. The special figure hold display area 208h4) is wider than each display area.

  As described above, the special reserved display area is a display area including a display area having the same size as the display area constituting the normal reserved display area, and at least one display area constituting the special reserved display area is normally The display area may be wider than the size of the display area constituting the hold display area.

  FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the third modification. In the third modification, a special reserved display area 208l is arranged in a display area overlapping with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208l is larger than the entire display area of the above-described special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. On the other hand, the size of each of the four display areas (the first special figure hold display area 20811 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208l4) constituting the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208l is: An area having the same size as each of the four display areas (first special figure hold display area 208h1 to fourth special figure hold display area 208h4) constituting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h Has been.

  In this way, the special reserved display area is a display area in which each of the display areas constituting the special reserved display area is the same size as each of the display areas constituting the normal reserved display area, and displays a decorative pattern. It may be a display area at least partially overlapping the symbol display area.

  FIG. 6D is a diagram showing a special hold display area according to the fourth modification. In the fourth modification, the special reserved display area 208m is arranged in a part of the effect display area 208d (display area that does not overlap with the three symbol display areas 208a to 208c). In addition, the size of the entire display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208m is smaller than the overall display area of the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. Has been. On the other hand, the size of the display area of the special figure hold display area (special hold display area) 208m is four display areas (first special figure hold display area 208h1) constituting the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h. To a fourth special figure hold display area 208h4) that are wider than the respective display areas. In the fourth modification, a hold icon suggesting the number of holds with a number (4 in this example) is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208m.

  In this way, the special reserved display area is a display area in which the entire special reserved display area is larger than the size of each of the display areas constituting the normal reserved display area. It may be suggested by letters.

<Other examples of hold icons>
FIG. 28A is a diagram showing another example of the hold icon in the special figure hold display area 208j shown in FIG. In this example, in the third special figure hold display area 208j3 of the special figure hold display area 208j, an image simulating a snowman, that is, a hold icon indicating that the expectation of the profit given to the player is high is displayed. ing. As a result, the expectation of profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to the third hold (the special figure variable game three times ahead of the current special figure variable game) is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variable A) Can be suggested to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. Here, as in this example, a special hold display capable of specifying a hold number (digestion order) of a special figure variable game with high expectation may be referred to as a “special specific hold display”.

  FIG. 28B is a diagram showing another example of the hold icon in the special figure hold display area 208m shown in FIG. In this example, in the special figure hold display area 208m, on the image imitating a snowman, that is, on the hold icon that suggests that the expectation of the profit given to the player is high, the number of special figure variable games held is displayed. A hold icon is displayed in which numbers (4 in this example) are superimposed. As a result, the player expects that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the four hold numbers is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. Here, as in this example, a special hold display in which it is impossible to specify a hold number (digestion order) of a special figure variable game with high expectation may be referred to as a “special unspecified hold display”. The display mode of the hold icon is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (b-1), instead of the number suggesting the number of hold of the special figure variable game, a Chinese numeral (in this example, 3) may be applied, or the number of holds may be suggested by displaying the same type of characters (in this example, wood) or the same type of figure (in this example, an asterisk) for the number of holds. Good.

  FIG. 28 (c) is a diagram showing another example of the hold icon in the special figure hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 25 (b). In this example, whenever the number of special figure variable games held increases, the same image (in this example, an umbrella in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 of the special figure hold display area 208j). , That is, a hold icon indicating that the expected degree of profit given to the player is medium. As a result, the expectation level of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, a plurality, or all of the four holdings is medium (for example, winning 4R probability variation A). Can be suggested to the player, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In this example, every time the number of holds increases, a hold icon corresponding to the hold is displayed in all of the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a hold icon different from the hold icon corresponding to the hold may be displayed in all of the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4.

<Transition example of power interruption / recovery during Mode B (Princess Mode) or Mode C (Tsubaki Mode)>
FIG. 29A is an example of the case where the power to the pachinko machine 100 is shut off when the production mode is mode B (princess mode) and the mode is changed to mode A (donor mode) after the power is restored. (B) is a case where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is cut off (power cut off) when the production mode is mode C (爺 mode), and the mode is changed to mode A (female mode) after the power is restored (after power recovery). It is an example.

  In this example, when the pachinko machine 100 is cut off and restored, mode A (only the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed, regardless of the type of effect mode before the power cut. (Mr. mode). In this way, in the case of a power interruption / recovery, giving the player a false expectation that it may be possible to gain some benefit if the mode is shifted to the most disadvantageous performance mode for the player. And will not diminish gaming motivation.

<Migration example of special specific hold display and special non-specific hold display>
FIG. 30A is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the special specific hold display illustrated in FIG. 28A to the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 28B at the start of reach production. is there. In this example, the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to the third hold (the special figure variable game three times ahead of the current special figure variable game) by the special specific hold display until just before the start of the reach effect. After suggesting to the player that the expectation level of the player is high (for example, winning 16R probability variation A), at the same time as the start of reach production, one or more of the three hold numbers, Or, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to all the holdings is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing an example of shifting from the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 28B to the special specific hold display illustrated in FIG. 28A at the end of the reach effect. is there. In this example, until the end of the reach production, the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the three holdings by the special unspecified holding display is high. After suggesting to the player (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A), immediately after the end of the reach production, the special specific variable display (current special variable game) This indicates to the player that the degree of expectation of the profit given by the second special figure fluctuation game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  As described above, during the reach effect, the special specific hold display may be switched to the special non-specific hold display, so that the player may be focused on the reach effect while suggesting the hold state of the special figure.

  FIG. 30 (c) is a diagram showing an example of transition from the special specific hold display illustrated in FIG. 28 (a) to the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 28 (b) at the start of the big hit game. is there. In this example, the profit given by the special figure change game corresponding to the second hold (the special figure change game two times ahead of the current special figure change game) by the special specific hold display until just before the start of the big hit game After suggesting that the player has high expectation (for example, winning 16R probability variation A), at the same time as the jackpot game starts, a special unspecified hold display indicates one or more of the three hold numbers, Or, it is suggested to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to all the holdings is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  FIG. 30D is a diagram showing an example of transition from the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 28B to the special specific hold display illustrated in FIG. 28A at the end of the big hit game. is there. In this example, until the end of the jackpot game, the special unspecified hold display shows that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, multiple, or all of the three hold numbers is high After suggesting to the player (for example, winning 16R probability change A), immediately after the end of the big hit game, the special special variable display corresponding to the first special hold display (current special map variable game) This indicates to the player that the degree of expectation of the profit given by the first special figure fluctuation game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  In this way, in the big hit game, by switching the special specific hold display to the special non-specific hold display, the player may be able to concentrate on the big hit game while suggesting the hold state of the special figure.

<Example of power interruption / recovery transition during special unspecified hold display>
FIG. 31 shows an example in which the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off when the production mode is mode B (princess mode) and special unspecified hold display is performed, and the mode is changed to mode A (dono mode) after the power is restored. FIG.

  In this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off / restored, mode A (only the special figure hold display area (normal hold display area) 208h is displayed regardless of the effect mode before the power is cut off. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 does not back up the prefetch information (because the prefetch information disappears due to power interruption), so it is displayed in the special special figure hold display area 208m before the power is cut off. Instead of the special unspecified hold display, the normal hold display area 208h is configured to perform normal hold display. In this way, in the case of a power interruption / recovery, giving the player a false expectation that it may be possible to gain some benefit if it is configured to display normal hold instead of special hold display. And will not diminish the willingness to play.

<Example of special unspecified hold display triggered by increase in hold>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 28B is performed with the increase in the hold of the special figure variable game as an opportunity. In this example, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the hold icon is displayed in the special special figure hold display area 208j until immediately before the start of the reach effect, and then the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 32 (b). At the same time, a number (in this example, 2) indicating the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208m.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4C, the number of special figure 1 variable games held increased by 1 and changed from 2 to 3 due to winning at the first special figure start opening 230 during the reach production. As an opportunity, special unspecified display shown in FIG. Here, due to the special unspecified display, the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the three holding numbers is high (for example, winning 16R probability variation A is won) To the player).

  Also, as shown in (f-1) to (f-3) in the figure, the hold icon is displayed in the special hold display area 208j at the same time that the variable display of the special figure in the reach state is stopped. . Specifically, in the example shown in (f-1) of the figure, in the third special figure hold display area 208h3, the special figure change corresponding to the hold (third hold) won at the timing shown in (c) of the figure. A special special figure hold display is provided to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-2) of the figure, the second special figure hold display area 208h2 corresponds to a hold (second hold) other than the hold (third hold) won at the timing shown in (c) of FIG. A special special figure hold display is made to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-3) of the figure, in the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the third special figure hold display area 208h3, the special figure corresponding to one, plural, or all of the three hold numbers. A special special figure hold display is provided that suggests to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the figure variation game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special unspecified hold display illustrated in FIG. 28B is performed with a plurality of hold increases in the special figure variable game as an opportunity. In this example, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), after the hold icon is displayed in the special hold display area 208j until immediately before the start of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), simultaneously with the start of the reach effect. In the special figure hold display area 208m, a number (2 in this example) suggesting the number of holds is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5C, the number of special figure 1 variable games held is two due to winning a plurality of times (in this example, twice) to the first special figure starting port 230 during reach production. The special unspecified display shown in (d) of FIG. 11 is performed with the change from 2 to 4 as an opportunity. Here, due to the special unspecified display, the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to one, plural, or all of the four holding numbers is high (for example, winning 16R probability variation A is won) To the player).

  Also, as shown in (f-1) to (f-3) in the figure, the hold icon is displayed in the special hold display area 208j at the same time that the variable display of the special figure in the reach state is stopped. . Specifically, in the example shown in (f-1) in the figure, in the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4, the special figure change corresponding to the hold (fourth hold) won at the timing shown in FIG. A special special figure hold display is provided to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-2) of the figure, in the third special figure hold display area 208h3, it corresponds to a hold (third hold) other than the hold (fourth hold) won in the timing of (c) in the same figure. A special special figure hold display is made to suggest to the player that the expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game is high (for example, winning the 16R probability variation A). In the example shown in (f-3) in the figure, in the third special figure hold display area 208h3 and the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4, the pay hold (fourth hold) at the timing shown in FIG. The expectation of the profit given by the special figure variable game corresponding to any of the holds (third hold) other than the hold (fourth hold) is high (for example, winning 16R probability change A) Special special figure hold display to suggest to the player.

<Moving object / second effect moving body 225>
FIG. 34A is a diagram illustrating an example in which a part of the special special figure holding display area 208j is covered with the second effect movable body 225 which is one of the movable objects. As described above, the second effect movable body 225 can move in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the vertical direction, and the first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, FIG. 1), a part of the symbol display area (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a part of the special reserved display area 208j. It can move between the second positions to be covered (for example, the positions shown in FIG. 2A-2). Therefore, when the second effect movable body 225 moves from the first position to the second position, the symbol display area (left symbol display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as shown in FIG. At least a part of the area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c) and at least a part of the special reserved display area 208j are invisible or difficult to see from the front. Thus, if at least a part of the hold icon and the variable icon is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

<Moving object / shielding device 246>
FIG. 34B is a diagram showing an example in which a special special figure holding display area 208j is partially covered by the shielding device 246 that is one of the movable objects. As described above, the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 are movable in the left-right direction, and are shown in a first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, shown in FIG. Position), a part of the symbol display area (left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a part of the special reserved display area 208j. It can move between positions (for example, the positions shown in FIG. 2B-2). Therefore, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 are moved from the first position to the second position, the symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed as shown in FIG. At least a part of the areas (the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c) and at least a part of the special reserved display area 208j are invisible or difficult to see from the front. Thus, if at least a part of the hold icon and the variable icon is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

<Moving object / first effect moving body 224>
FIGS. 35A to 35C are diagrams showing an example in which a display relating to the big hit game and a part of the special special figure hold display are covered by the effect movable body 224 which is one of the movable objects. As described above, the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224 are movable in an arc shape in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is , Movable between a second position that covers a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, the positions shown in (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2)). It is. Therefore, when the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224 are moved from the first position to the second position, (a-2), (b-2), (c- As shown in 2), at least a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes invisible or difficult to view from the front.

  In the same figure (a-1), the number of balls won by the jackpot game (12680 balls in this example) is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special reserved display area 208m of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. An on-hold icon indicating the number of figure-changed games held (3 in this example) is displayed, and in the display area adjacent to the special holding display area 208m, an acquired number-of-balls image corresponding to the number of acquired balls in the big hit game (in this example) 1 large thousand box corresponding to 10,000 balls, two medium size thousand boxes corresponding to 1000 balls, and six small thousand boxes corresponding to 100 balls). And in the same figure (a-2), the forearm part 224b of the 1st production movable body 224 is moved to the 2nd position, and special special figure reservation display area 208m and a part of display area adjacent to this are covered. Thus, at least a part of the hold icon and the acquired number-of-balls image is invisible or difficult to view from the front. In this way, if at least a part of the hold icon and the acquired number-of-balls image is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In the same figure (b-1), the number of consecutive hits of the big hit game (15 in this example) is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the special reserved display area 208m of the decorative symbol display device 208, A suspension icon indicating the number of suspensions of the special figure variable game (in this example, 3) is displayed, and in the display area adjacent to the special suspension display area 208m, the number of consecutive games corresponding to the number of consecutive games of the big hit game (this example In this example, one medium-sized thousand-thousand box corresponding to ten consecutive villas and five small one-thousand boxes corresponding to one consecutive villa are displayed. And in the same figure (b-2), the forearm part 224b of the 1st production movable body 224 is moved to the 2nd position, and the special reservation display area 208m and a part of display area adjacent to this are covered. In addition, at least a part of the hold icon and the consecutive resort count image is invisible or difficult to view from the front. Thus, if at least a part of the hold icon and the number of consecutive resort images is made invisible or difficult to view from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

  In the same figure (c-1), the number of rounds of the big hit game (1R (1st round) in this example) is displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special reserved display area 208m of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. On the other hand, a hold icon indicating the number of hold of the special figure variable game (3 in this example) is displayed, and a round number image corresponding to the number of rounds of the big hit game (in this example) is displayed in the display area adjacent to the special hold display area 208m. In this case, one small thousand car box corresponding to 1R) is displayed. And in the same figure (c-2), the forearm part 224b of the 1st production movable body 224 is moved to the 2nd position, and the special reservation display area 208m and a part of display area adjacent to this are covered. In addition, at least a part of the hold icon and all the round number images are invisible or difficult to view from the front. In this way, if at least a part of the hold icon and all of the number of round images are made invisible or difficult to see from the front by the movable object, the player's interest may be enhanced.

<Display mode of special special figure hold display and normal special figure hold display>
FIG. 36 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are deleted (or displayed) in the same direction when the number of special figure floating games held decreases (or increases). is there. In this example, as shown in (a-1) in the figure, the special pending display area 208j0 of the special reserved display area 208j, the first special figure reserved display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure reserved display area 208j4, The display area is arranged from left to right in ascending order of the number of holds, and the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 of the normal hold display area 208h are arranged from left to right. Arranged in ascending order of the number of holds.

  Thus, for example, when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 4 to 3, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The hold icon displayed in the special figure changing display area 208j0 and displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1, and displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. The held hold icon is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2, and the hold icon displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from right to left.

  On the other hand, in the normal special figure hold display, the image displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208h1, and the image displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208h2, and the image displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. As a result, the normal special figure hold display is erased from right to left, and the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are erased in the same direction (in this example, from right to left). Although not shown, the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are displayed in the same direction (in this example, from the left to the right) even when the number of special figure variable games held increases.

  On the other hand, FIG. 5B shows an example in which the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are erased (or displayed) in the opposite direction when the number of special figure variable games held decreases (or increases). FIG. In this example, as shown in (b-1) in the figure, there are five special hold display areas 208j0 of the special hold display area 208j, the first special figure hold display area 208j1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4. The display area is arranged from left to right in descending order of the number of holds, and the first special figure hold display area 208h1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 of the normal hold display area 208h are arranged from left to right. Arranged in ascending order of the number of holds.

  Therefore, for example, when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 4 to 3, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The hold icon displayed in the special figure changing display area 208j0 and displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1, and displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. The held hold icon is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2, and the hold icon displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from left to right.

  On the other hand, in the normal special figure hold display, the image displayed in the second special figure hold display area 20hj2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208h1, and the image displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208h2, and the image displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208h4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208h3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from right to left, and the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are in opposite directions (in this example, the special special figure hold display is from left to right, The figure hold display is erased from right to left. Although not shown, the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are in the opposite direction even when the number of special figure floating games held increases (in this example, the special special figure hold display moves from right to left. The normal special figure hold display is displayed from the left to the right).

  FIG. 37 is a schematic front view of a game board 260 according to a modification as viewed from the front. In this example, a special hold display area 208j is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a normal hold display area formed by a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs on the lower left side of the game board 260. 208n are arranged. The special hold display area 208j is composed of five display areas, a special figure changing display area 208j0 and a first special figure hold display area 208j1 to a fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. Yes. The normal hold display area 208n is composed of four display areas, a first special figure hold display area 208n1 to a fourth special figure hold display area 208n4, which are arranged in a straight line in the diagonally downward direction.

  In this example, the virtual line L1 in which the five display areas 208j0 to 208j4 of the special hold display area 208j are arranged and the virtual line L2 in which the four display areas (LEDs) 208n1 to 208n4 of the normal hold display area 208n are arranged are the game board 260. The upper virtual point VP is intersected. Thus, for example, when the number of special figure variable games held decreases from 4 to 3, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1 is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208j0, The hold icon displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208j2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208j1, and the hold icon displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3 is displayed in the second special figure hold display area. The hold icon displayed in 208j2 and displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208j4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3. As a result, the special special figure hold display is erased from right to left.

  On the other hand, in the normal special figure hold display, the image displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208n2 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208n1, and the image displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208n3. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208n2, and the image displayed in the fourth special figure hold display area 208n4 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208n3. As a result, the normal special figure hold display is erased from the lower left to the upper left, and both the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are erased in a direction approaching the virtual point VP. Although not shown, when the number of special figure variable games held increases, both the special special figure hold display and the normal special figure hold display are displayed in a direction away from the virtual point VP. The special special figure hold display may be displayed in a direction away from the virtual point VP, and the normal special figure hold display may be displayed in a direction approaching the virtual point VP, or the special special figure hold display may be virtual. You may comprise so that it may be displayed in the direction which approaches the point VP, and a normal special figure hold display is displayed in the direction which leaves | separates from the virtual point VP.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram in which a part of the game board 260 shown in FIG. 37 is extracted. In this example, the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224 is moved to the above-described second position, and at least a part of the special reserved display area 208j is made invisible or difficult to view from the front. Since the four display areas (LEDs) 208n1 to 208n4 of the figure hold display area 208n are arranged at positions not covered by the forearm portion 224b of the first effect movable body 224, the normal special figure hold display is the first effect movable. The body 224 does not hinder visual recognition from the front.

  However, as shown in FIG. 39, since the four display areas (LEDs) 208n1 to 208n4 of the normal special figure hold display area 208n are arranged at positions where the game ball B can pass, the four display areas (LED) When a game ball passes at least a part of 208n1 to 208n4, a part of the display area is temporarily covered with the ball game ball B, and the normal special figure hold display is temporarily invisible or difficult to see from the front. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, the ratio of making the special special figure hold display invisible or difficult to view by the effect movable body 224 (for example, when the 1000 game balls are launched on the game board surface, the effect movable body 224 is moved once. The special special figure hold display is made invisible or difficult to see, or the special movable figure 224 is moved once every time the special figure fluctuation display is performed 80 times to make the special special figure hold display invisible or difficult to see. The ratio of the normal special figure hold display area to be invisible or difficult to see with the game ball B (for example, when 2500 game balls are launched on the game board surface, one of the 2500 games) Sphere B is set to be higher than the ratio of the normal special figure holding display area invisible or difficult to view.

<Special Figure 1 Hold Display Area and Special Figure 2 Hold Display Area>
FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of special figure 1 variable games and the number of special figure 2 variable games held are separately displayed, and the number of special figure 2 variable games held is covered by a movable body. In the example shown in FIG. 6A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a special figure 2 hold display area 208p for indicating the number of special figure 2 variable games on hold and a special figure 1 variable game hold on the display. A special figure 1 hold display area 208q and a change display area 208r for displaying information related to the changing special figure change game are provided, and the special figure 2 hold display area 208p is replaced with the special figure 1 hold display area 208q. Arranged above.

  In this example, the second effect movable body 225 has a first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a second position that covers a part of the special figure 2 reserved display area 208p (for example, FIG. It is possible to move between the positions shown in a-2). Therefore, when the second effect movable body 225 moves from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. It becomes invisible or difficult to see from the front.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 holding display area 208p and the special figure 1 holding display area 208q are arranged on both sides in the horizontal direction with the variation display area 208r used in common. In addition, the hold display in the special figure 2 hold display area 208p disappears from the right to the left, and the hold display in the special figure 1 hold display area 208q disappears from the left to the right.

  In this example, the first effect movable body 224 is a second position that covers the first position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 2 reserved display area 208p, and a part of the change display area 208r. It can move between positions (for example, the positions shown in FIG. 2B-2). Therefore, when the first effect movable body 224 moves from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 4B-2, the special figure 2 hold display area 208p and the change display area 208r. At least a part of is invisible or difficult to see from the front.

<Over winning notice>
Next, over-winning notification will be described. Here, the over winning is the number of balls exceeding the maximum number of balls per 1R (for example, 10 when the opening time of the door member is 30 seconds), and the maximum number of balls is exceeded. In this embodiment, up to two over winnings are recognized.

<Over-winning notification / In case of one over-winning after maximum number of balls>
FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of winning notification when one over winning is detected after maximum winning, and FIG. 41 (b) shows an example of a display mode of over winning. FIG. Here, “door open” in the figure indicates that the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235) is in an open state, and “door closed” indicates the first. It shows that the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235) is in a closed state. “Detection valid” is a period during which the ball detection sensor is permitted to detect a ball that has entered the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 (or the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235). (Period in which detection is valid), and “invalid detection” indicates a period in which the detection is prohibited (period in which detection is invalid). Further, “winning” indicates that the ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning), and “non-winning” indicates that the winning (winning) is not detected. Further, “winning notification” indicates that over-winning notification is performed, and “no winning notification” indicates that the notification is not performed.

  In this example, the 1R game is terminated when the maximum number (10) of balls (winning) is detected during the opening of the 1R door member of the jackpot game. Since one over-winning (11th pitch) was detected in the game, an over-winning notification as shown in FIG. 120), and the over-winning notification is finished simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game.

  In this example, the over-winning notification is ended simultaneously with the start of the next round, but may be continued after the next round. Further, the over-winning notification is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 5B, for example, the notification may be performed by moving the above-described movable body. Multiple or all may be used. Further, when it is determined in the prefetch process that the special figure variable game suspension includes a big hit game, an over-winning special notification (in this example, a decorative symbol display device) as shown in FIG. An image 208 (a special image different from the normal over-winning notification) and characters may be displayed, and a sound output from the speaker 120 (a special sound different from the normal over-winning notification) may be performed.

  Further, in this example, there are two balls (the eleventh ball and the twelfth ball) after the 1R door member is closed, but the 12th ball is “detection invalid”. During the period, the ball detection sensor detects the winning (winning), but actually does not count as winning and does not perform the corresponding over winning notification.

<Over-winning notification / In case of two over-winnings after maximum pitch>
FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of winning notification when two over winnings after the maximum winning are detected, and FIGS. 42 (b) to (d) show over winning display modes. It is the figure which showed an example.

  In this example, the game of the 1R is terminated when 10 balls (winning) are detected during the opening period of the door member of the 1R of the big hit game. Since a winning (11th and 12th balls) was detected, the first over-winning was triggered by the first over-winning and the second over The second winning notification corresponding to the second over-winning is started upon winning, the first winning notification is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game, and the second winning notification is changed to the first winning notification. The second prize notification is ended after the same period.

  During the period in which only the first winning notification is performed, an over winning notification (in this example, display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208 and output of sound by the speaker 120) as shown in FIG. During the period in which both the first winning notification and the second winning notification are performed, an over winning notification (in this example, an image by the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same image as the previous over winning notification is displayed) as shown in FIG. 2) and the display of characters and the sound of the speaker 120 (output the same sound as the previous over-winning notification twice) and only the second winning notification is performed, as shown in FIG. An over-winning notification has started. In this example, the second winning notification is performed for the same period as the first winning notification, but may be terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game in the same manner as the first winning notification. Further, in a period in which both the first prize notification and the second prize notification are performed, two images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, or two sounds may be output in a superimposed manner.

  FIG. 43A is a diagram showing the execution timing of other winning notifications when two over winnings are detected. FIGS. 43B to C are examples of over winning display modes. FIG.

  In this example, the game of the 1R is terminated when 10 balls (winning) are detected during the opening period of the door member of the 1R of the jackpot game. Since a winning (11th and 12th balls) was detected, the first over-winning was triggered by the first over-winning and the second over At the same time as the winning, the first winning notification is terminated, and simultaneously, the second winning notification corresponding to the second over winning is started, and the second winning notification is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game.

  During the period in which the first winning notification is performed, an over winning notification as shown in FIG. 5B is performed (in this example, the display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the output of sound by the speaker 120). During the period of performing the two-winning notification, an over-winning notification (in this example, an image (an image different from the first winning notification) by the decorative symbol display device 208) and characters (first winning notification and Display of a different character) and output of a sound from the speaker 120 (a sound different from the first prize notification). In this example, the first prize notification is started at the same time as the second overwinning is triggered, but the second prize notification is started at the same time, but the first prize notification is terminated when the detection is changed from valid to invalid. In addition, the second winning notification may be started, or the number of over winnings may be counted in response to the change from the detection valid to the detection invalid, and the over winning notification according to the count value may be performed.

<Over-winning notification / one over-winning after closing door>
FIG. 44A is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of winning notification when one over winning is detected after the door member is closed. In this example, the 1R game is terminated when the maximum opening time (30 seconds in this example) of the 1R door member of the jackpot game has elapsed. Since (the winning of the maximum open time has elapsed) is detected, the winning notification corresponding to the over winning is started after the over winning, and then the winning notification is terminated simultaneously with the start of the next 2R game.

<Over-winning notification / one over-winning before closing door>
FIG. 44B is a diagram illustrating the execution of a winning notification when one over winning is detected before the door member is closed. In this example, the 1R game is terminated when the maximum opening time of the 1R door member of the jackpot game (in this example, 0.1 second) has elapsed. Since one over-winning (a win exceeding the maximum number of balls) was detected during the opening, the winning notification corresponding to the over-winning was started when the over-winning was triggered, and then the winning notification was terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time. ing.

<Abnormality notification>
Next, an abnormality occurrence notification, which is an example of a winning abnormality handling process (step S306) in the winning opening counter updating process described above, will be described. FIG. 45 (a) is a diagram showing the execution timing of abnormality occurrence notification performed in the winning abnormality handling process, and FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an abnormality occurrence notification.

  As described above, in step S304 of the winning prize counter updating process, the variable winning mouth abnormality determination value is acquired based on the variable winning mouth abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 8A and the hit type. For example, when the winning type is 4R probability variation A or 4R probability variation B, 52 is acquired as the abnormality determination value for the variable prize opening.

  Subsequently, in step S305 of the winning opening counter updating process, the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) is determined as the abnormality determination value for the variable winning opening acquired in step S304 (in this example, 52), and if it is greater than or equal to the abnormality determination value (52 in this example), a winning abnormality handling process is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. In the fourth round, if it is determined that the number of winnings in the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235) is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination value (52 in this example), the winning abnormality handling process is performed. Do.

  In this example, as the winning abnormality handling process, an abnormality occurrence signal is output from the information output circuit 336 controlled by the main control unit 300 to the outside (for example, a hall computer) for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example). Anomaly occurrence notification (in this example, the display of images and characters by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the output of sound by the speaker 120) as shown in FIG. 5B continues for a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) or more. And do it. Note that the abnormality occurrence notification mode is not limited to this example. For example, the abnormality occurrence notification duration may be less than a predetermined period or the same period as the predetermined period. Moreover, although the example which performs both the output of an abnormality occurrence signal and abnormality notification is shown, you may comprise so that only either may be performed.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example in which an abnormality occurrence signal is output based on a plurality of types of factors. In this example, whether or not the level of the ball detection sensor is abnormal (detection or cancellation of sensor level abnormality), whether or not abnormality is detected in winning (detection or cancellation of winning abnormality), and abnormality is detected in the magnetic field Whether or not (detection or cancellation of magnetic field abnormality) is detected, and when any abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence signal is output from the information output circuit 336 controlled by the main control unit 300 as the above-described winning abnormality handling process. It is configured to output to the outside for a predetermined period (in this example, 30 seconds).

<Over-winning notification and abnormal occurrence notification>
FIG. 47A is a time chart showing an example in which an abnormality occurrence notification is made during over-winning notification. In this example, the 4R game is terminated when the maximum number (10) of balls (winning) is detected during the opening period of the 4R door member of the jackpot game. Since the maximum number of balls entered +3 is detected in the game, the over-winning notification is started simultaneously with the detection of the first over-winning. Further, during the over-winning notification, it is determined that the number of winnings in the variable winning opening is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination value (52 in this example) by detecting one additional ball. Both output and abnormality notification are performed. That is, in this example, during the over-winning notification, the output of the abnormality occurrence signal and the abnormality occurrence notification are started simultaneously.

  FIG. 5B is a time chart showing an example in which the abnormality occurrence notification is performed simultaneously with the over winning notification. In this example, the 4R game is terminated when the maximum number (10) of balls (winning) is detected during the opening period of the 4R door member of the jackpot game. Since one over winning is detected in the game, the over winning notification is started simultaneously with the detection of the over winning. In addition, it is determined that the number of winnings in the variable winning opening is equal to or greater than the abnormality determination value (52 in this example) due to this one over-winning, and both the output of the abnormality occurrence signal and the abnormality occurrence notification are performed. . That is, in this example, the over winning notification, the output of the abnormality occurrence signal, and the abnormality occurrence notification are started simultaneously. In addition, in the same figure (a), (b), although the example which performs the output of an abnormality occurrence signal and abnormality notification after the last round of a big hit game was shown, the output and abnormality of an abnormality occurrence signal were shown in the middle round of a big hit game Occurrence notification may be performed.

<Embodiment 2>
Next, a pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a part of the prefetch information according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 16, the variation type A is configured to be transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch information. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is configured to transmit the information of the timer group shown in the figure from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch information.

  Here, the timer group is obtained by classifying the variation type 1 (timer 1) to the variation type 22 (timer 22) of the variation type A into a plurality of groups (seven in this example). In this example, variation type 1 (timer 1) to variation type 5 (timer 5) are classified into a timer group (immediately out of sync), and variation type 6 (timer 6) to variation type 7 (timer 7) are timers. It is classified into a group (low expectation: loss), and the variation type 8 (timer 8) to the variation type 10 (timer 10) are classified into a timer group (small expectation: hit), and the variation type 11 (timer 11) to variation type. 13 (timer 13) is classified into a timer group (expected: hit), and variation type 14 (timer 14) to variation type 15 (timer 15) are classified into a timer group (expected: out of date). 16 (timer 16) to variation type 17 (timer 17) are classified into timer groups (large expectation: disappointment), and variation type 18 (timer 18) to variation type 22 (timer 22) are classified into timer groups. -Loop: have been classified into (expected large out).

  49 to 52 are diagrams showing an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table according to the second embodiment. In this hold icon display mode lottery table, the display mode of the hold icon and the lottery value defined for each timer group are stored in association with each other. The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the hold icon display mode lottery table, the prefetch information (timer group) included in the hold increase command received from the main control unit 300, and the acquired lottery value. The holding icon change scenario lottery for determining the display mode of the holding icon is performed. If the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 3, refer to the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 49 (the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning 3), and the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 2 50, refer to the table for holding icon display mode lottery shown in FIG. 50 (the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning 2), and when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 1, the holding icon display mode shown in FIG. When the lottery table (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning a prize is 1) and the number of remaining holds at the time of winning a prize is 0, the holding icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. ).

  For example, when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 3, refer to the table shown in FIG. 49, and when the timer group information included in the prefetch information is 1, the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 0-79. When the scenario of “white → − → − → −” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 80 to 82, the display mode of the hold icon is “white → blue → When the scenario of “-→-” is selected and the acquired lottery value is in the range of 83 to 84, the scenario of “white → − → blue → −” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and the acquired lottery value When the numerical value range of 85 to 87 is selected, the scenario of “white → − → − → blue” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon, and when the acquired lottery value ranges from 88 to 89, the hold icon The display mode is “blue → − → − → −”. Select the tail when the numerical range of the acquired lottery value of 90 to 99, "box → - → - → -" as a display aspect of the pending icon to select a scenario of.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of a variation icon display mode lottery table according to the second embodiment. In the variation icon display mode lottery table, a hold icon display group, a variation icon display mode, and a lottery value defined for each timer number are stored in association with each other. The “big hit reliability” shown in the figure is an example of the big hit reliability of the variation icon in the non-electric support state and the non-probability variable state in the special figure 1 variable game, and other game states (electric support state) Or the same big hit reliability may be set in different probability states), or different big hit reliability may be set for each state.

  In addition, the display mode of the variable icon includes a common display mode (for example, white, blue, and red belonging to the sphere system) common to the display mode of the hold icon, and a unique display mode (for example, a sphere system) that is different from the display mode of the hold icon. And smoke belonging to the box system, smoke, liquor, sword, family crest). In addition, although the display mode of the hold icon may have a unique display mode different from the display mode of the variable icon, in this case, the type of the specific display mode of the hold icon is more than the type of the unique display mode of the variable icon. It is preferable to reduce it.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 includes the fluctuation icon display mode lottery table, the hold icon display group to which the display mode of the hold icon selected in the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery belongs, and the main control unit 300. Based on the pre-read information (timer number) included in the received hold increase command and the acquired lottery value, a variation icon lottery that determines the display mode of the variation icon is performed.

  For example, when the display mode of the hold icon selected in the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery is “white”, the table of the hold icon display group “sphere system” to which the display mode belongs is referred to and included in the prefetch information. When the timer number information is 4, when the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 0 to 96, “white” is selected as the display mode of the variable icon, and when the numerical value range of the acquired lottery value is 97 to 99 Selects “blue” as the display mode of the variation icon. For example, when the display mode of the hold icon selected in the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery is “box”, the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the display mode belongs is referred to and the prefetch information is displayed. When the information of the timer number included is 8, and the numerical range of the acquired lottery value is 0 to 69, “smoke” is selected as the display mode of the variation icon, and the numerical range of the acquired lottery value is 70 to 99. In this case, “sword” is selected as the display mode of the variation icon.

<Display example 1 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
Next, display examples of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a display example 1 of the change icon and the hold icon.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in addition to the symbol display region for displaying a decorative symbol, a special-fluctuation changing display region 208s0 for displaying a variable icon and a hold icon 1 are displayed. A first special figure hold display area 208s1 for displaying, a second special figure hold display area 208s2 for displaying the hold icon 2, a third special figure hold display area 208s3 for displaying the hold icon 3, A fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 for displaying the hold icon 4 is arranged.

  In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 1 and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, the "white" hold icon 1 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and the special figure 1 is displayed. In accordance with the change display, the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In this state, for example, when a winning is made to the first special figure starting port 230, the main control unit 300 performs the above-described prefetching process (see FIG. 15), and obtains prefetching information including timer group information. The prefetch information is acquired and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. Here, a case is considered in which a pending increase command including at least the retained ball count information 1 at the time of winning, the timer number 21, and the pre-read information of the timer group 7 is transmitted.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the hold increase command performs the hold icon change scenario lottery process in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process (see FIG. 20B) described above. In this example, Since the number of remaining holds at the time of winning a prize is 1 and the timer group 7, a holding icon change scenario using the lottery value of the timer group 7 in the holding icon display mode lottery table (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning 1) shown in FIG. Make a lottery. Here, a case is considered in which a scenario of “box → thousand boxes” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon by the hold icon change scenario lottery.

  Subsequently, when the number of holds increases, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in step S1004 of the hold icon display control process described above. Since the number of holds increased from 1 to 2, the hold icon 2 corresponding to the “box” that is the hold icon at the time of winning in the scenario “box → thousand boxes” is shown in FIG. 2 is displayed in the special figure hold display area 208s2.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a variation icon lottery process in step S1102 of the above-described variation icon display control process (see FIG. 21). In this example, the first sub control unit 400 is selected by the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery. The variable icon lottery process is performed using the lottery value of the timer number 21 included in the prefetch information with reference to the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the “box” which is the display mode of the hold icon belongs. Here, the case where “family crest” is selected as the display mode of the change icon by the change icon lottery is considered.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 3C to 3D, the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the symbol display. The decorative symbol is stopped in the area, and the erased animation for gradually erasing the “white” fluctuation icon is displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208 s 0 in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 5E to 5G, the main control unit 300 in the first special figure display device 212 corresponds to the hold 1 at the time of winning in FIG. The variable display is performed, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 2 to 1, so that the first special figure hold display area 208s1 The displayed “white” hold icon 1 that has been displayed is gradually enlarged while being moved to the special figure changing display area 208s0. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the “box” hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2 as the hold icon after one change according to the scenario “box → thousand boxes”. While being gradually changed to the image of “Thousand boxes”, the hold icon 2 corresponding to “Thousand boxes” is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s1. In this example, the hold icon is gradually enlarged and changed to the change icon. However, the hold icon may be displayed as a change icon without being enlarged, and the change icon larger than the hold icon may be displayed. May be prepared in advance and the variation icon may be displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11H, the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. In accordance with the stop display in FIG. 1, an erase animation for gradually erasing the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) to (l) of the figure, the main control unit 300 of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 2 at the time of winning in the figure (b) in the first special figure display device 212. The variable display is performed, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs the variable display of the decoration symbol in the symbol display area, and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 1 to 0, so that the first special figure hold display area 208s1. The displayed hold icon 1 of the “thousand box” is moved in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0, and at a predetermined timing, the “thousand box” is changed to the “family crest” selected by the change icon lottery. Then, the “family crest” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In this way, by displaying “family crest” that is not included in the hold icon (not used for notifying the number of holds) as a change icon in the special figure changing display area 208s0, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. Compared with the case where the special figure changing display area 208s0 is displayed as it is without changing, it is possible to surely notify the player that the number of holdings has been reduced and the special figure has started to change. Will not diminish motivation.

  In addition, when moving the hold icon 1 of “Thousand boxes” in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0, the movement of the hold icon 1 is made conspicuous by passing over the decorative pattern being changed and displayed. You may comprise so that it may emphasize that the number decreased (a player is made aware). Further, the animation mode for changing the display mode of the hold icon (in this example, a thousand boxes) and the animation mode for changing the display mode of the change icon (in this example, a family crest) may be different from each other. Also, in FIG. 5 (k), the hold icon and the change icon are displayed at the same time. However, in order to emphasize that the number of holds has decreased (to make the player notice), the display of the hold icon is changed to the display of the change icon. It may be configured so that both are not displayed at the same time.

<Display example 2 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a display example 2 of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols on the symbol display area. Since the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0 and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, the change icon is not displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0, and the first special figure hold display area No hold icon is displayed in 208s1 to 4th special figure hold display area 208s4. Note that the change icon is not displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the hold icon is not displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4. A frame line and a number indicating are displayed. Thereby, the player can know that some information is provided during the game even when the hold icon or the change icon is not displayed, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  In this state, for example, when a winning is made to the first special figure starting port 230, the main control unit 300 performs the above-described prefetching process (see FIG. 15), and obtains prefetching information including timer group information. The prefetch information is acquired and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. Here, a case is considered in which a hold increase command including at least the remaining ball number information 0 at the time of winning, the timer number 21, and the pre-read information of the timer group 7 is transmitted.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the hold increase command performs the hold icon change scenario lottery process in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process (see FIG. 20B) described above. In this example, Since the number of remaining holds at the time of winning a prize is 0 and the timer group 7, a holding icon change scenario using the lottery value of the timer group 7 in the holding icon display mode lottery table (the number of remaining holds at the time of winning 0) shown in FIG. Make a lottery. Here, a case is considered where the scenario of “thousand boxes” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon by the hold icon change scenario lottery.

  Subsequently, when the number of holds increases, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in step S1004 of the hold icon display control process described above. Then, since the number of holds has not increased, no hold icon is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 as shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a variation icon lottery process in step S1102 of the above-described variation icon display control process (see FIG. 21). In this example, the first sub control unit 400 is selected by the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery. The variable icon lottery process is performed using the lottery value of the timer number 21 included in the prefetch information with reference to the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the “thousand boxes” as the hold icon display mode belongs. Here, a case where “sword” is selected as the display mode of the variation icon by variation icon lottery is considered.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5B, the main control unit 300 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The “sword” selected by the variation icon lottery is displayed in the special figure variation display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 7C, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. After the reach display is performed, as shown in FIG. 4D, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a whitish color (white background) before the start of super reach production. As shown to (e), while starting the production of a super reach, the fluctuation icon currently displayed on the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0, the 1st special figure hold display area 208s1-the 4th special figure hold display area 208s4. Delete all the hold icons displayed in.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5F, the main control unit 300 displays the stop of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5G, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation changing display area 208s0 while performing “swing fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. As shown in (h) to (j) of FIG. 5, after all the change icons and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed. , An erasing animation for gradually erasing the fluctuation icon of “sword” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. Note that the mode of the erase animation may be changed depending on the jackpot reliability, or may be a common mode regardless of the jackpot reliability.

  In this way, even if there is no special figure variable game hold, if the change icon is displayed after the special figure change display, it is possible to make it seem that the special figure change game will be performed again. In some cases, it may be difficult to identify and prevent the game ball from being stopped.

<Display example 3 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a display example 3 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 1 and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “Thousand boxes” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1. In accordance with the change display, the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. Here, a case where the scenario of “box → thousand box” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon by the lottery of the hold icon change scenario, and “family crest” is selected as the display mode of the change icon by the variation icon lottery. Think.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C, the main control unit 300 performs stop display from the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub control unit 400 displays the symbol display. In the region, the stop display is performed from the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the erase animation for gradually erasing the “white” variation icon is displayed in the special-in-fluctuation display region 208s0 in accordance with the stop display of the special diagram 1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 9D to 9G, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the first special figure display device 212, and performs the first sub-control. The part 400 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, and the number of reserved special figure 1 games has decreased from 1 to 0, so that the “thousand boxes” held in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 is held. The icon 1 is moved in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0, and at a predetermined timing, the “thousand box” is changed to the “family crest” selected by the fluctuation icon lottery, and the “family crest” is specially shown. Displayed in the changing display area 208s0.

  Further, in addition to the display control of the hold icon and the change icon, the first sub control unit 400 performs reach display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area as shown in FIG. ), The entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a whitish color (white back) before the start of the super reach effect. As shown in FIG. , And all the hold icons displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5 (i), the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10J, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0 while performing “fluctuation fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. Except the change icon (family crest in this example), the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed.

  As described above, when it is determined that there is no special figure variable game hold and the result of the special figure variable game is wrong, the display area 208s0 is deleted after the special figure variable display area 208s0 is deleted. If the change icon displayed on the screen is left erased, the player does not feel uncomfortable and the game motivation is not reduced.

<Display example 4 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a display example 4 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 1 and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “box” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and the special figure 1 is displayed. In accordance with the change display, the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In this state, for example, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232, the main control unit 300 performs the above-described prefetching process (see FIG. 15) and obtains prefetching information including timer group information. The prefetch information is acquired and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as a pending increase command. Here, a case is considered in which a pending increase command including at least the retained ball count information 1 at the time of winning, the timer number 21, and the pre-read information of the timer group 7 is transmitted.

  On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the hold increase command performs the hold icon change scenario lottery process and displays the hold icon in step S1002 of the hold icon display control process (see FIG. 20B). In this example, the suspension icon change scenario lottery and the display of the suspension icon are performed only when the special figure 1 variable game is suspended. Here, the special figure 2 variable game is suspended. In this case, the hold icon change scenario lottery and the hold icon are not displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a variation icon lottery process in step S1102 of the above-described variation icon display control process (see FIG. 21). In this example, the first sub control unit 400 is selected by the above-described hold icon change scenario lottery. The variable icon lottery process is performed using the lottery value of the timer number 21 included in the prefetch information with reference to the table of the hold icon display group “box system” to which the “box” which is the display mode of the hold icon belongs. Here, a case is considered in which “blue” of the spherical system is selected as the display mode of the change icon by the change icon lottery.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5C, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 stop on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. In accordance with the stop display in FIG. 1, an erase animation for gradually erasing the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 4D to 4E, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the suspension of the special figure 2 variable game on the second special figure display device 214. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and displays the “blue” variation icon selected in the variation icon lottery in the special-fluctuation display region 208s0. At this time, the moving animation representing the movement mode from the holding icon to the fluctuation icon is not performed, and the holding icon 1 of “box” displayed in the first special figure holding display area 208s1. However, it is configured not to change the display mode triggered by the variable display of the special figure 2 (so as to change the display mode triggered only by the variable display of the special figure 1). In this example, the special figure changing display area 208s0 is used for two purposes: an area for displaying the fluctuation icon of the special figure 1 variable game and an area for displaying the fluctuation icon of the special figure 2 variable game. I use it.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 5F to 5H, the main control unit 300 performs stop display of the special figure 2 on the second special figure display device 214, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the symbol. The decorative symbol is stopped in the area, and the erased animation for gradually erasing the “blue” fluctuation icon is displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208 s 0 in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 2. Note that the mode of the erased animation corresponding to the special figure 2 may be different from the mode of the erased animation corresponding to the special figure 1, and the type of the erased animation is based on the result of the special figure variation game and the pre-read information. It may be changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) to (k) of the figure, the main control unit 300, in the first special figure display device 212, special figure corresponding to the hold 1 of special figure 1 interrupted in special figure 2. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held has decreased from 2 to 1, so that the first special diagram hold display area The hold icon 1 of “box” displayed in 208s1 is displayed to move in the direction of the special figure changing display area 208s0. The “thousand boxes” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a display for moving the “white” hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2 in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and performs a predetermined operation. At the timing, the “white” is changed to “red” according to the scenario, and the “red” is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0.

<Display example 5 of change icon and hold icon>
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a display example 5 of the change icon and the hold icon. In this example, the main control unit 300 performs stop display of the special figure 1 variable game at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the first sub-control unit 400 corresponds to the hold 1 of the special figure 1 variable game. Fluctuation display has started. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the “blue” hold icon 1 displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 as the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game decreases from 1 to 0. It is changed to the “red” fluctuation icon and displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0, except for the fourth symbol display area indicating that the special figure is fluctuating as shown in FIG. A darkening effect that changes the display area to black is performed, and the “red” fluctuation icon that is to be displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0 is temporarily erased (the first elimination of the fluctuation icon).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10C, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the darkening effect, and the decorative symbol, the variation icon displayed in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0, and the first special control unit 400 are displayed. All the hold icons displayed in the figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed (the second display of the fluctuation icon).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 4D, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the reach of the super reach as shown in FIG. 5E after performing the reach display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display area. Previously, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a whitish color (white back), and as shown in FIG. All the change icons displayed in 208s0 and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are deleted (the second deletion of the change icon).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5G, the main control unit 300 performs the stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 9H, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0 while performing “sway fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. All the change icons that have been displayed and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed (third display of the change icon). In the third display of the variation icon, the mode (for example, color and pattern) is different from that of the second display. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player has some chance, and the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  Subsequently, as shown in (i) to (j) in the figure, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the super reach. In addition, the change icon displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are all erased. To do.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the main control unit 300 performs stop display of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. The stop display is performed, and the super reach effect is ended in accordance with the stop display in FIG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 6 (k), the first sub-control unit 400 displays the three decorative symbols in the special-fluctuation display area 208s0 while performing “fluctuation fluctuation” in which the three decorative symbols are swung left and right. All the change icons that have been displayed and the hold icons displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are displayed. The display of the variation icon is different from the previous display. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player has some chance, and the player's willingness to play may be increased. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 erases the variation icon based on the variation stop command received from the main control unit 300.

  Thus, in this example, one special figure variable game (in this example, the special figure variable game started immediately after the timing shown in FIG. 1A and stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 1G). ), The change icon is erased a plurality of times (in this example, the timing shown in FIG. 2B and the timing shown in FIG. 2G), but it is erased once. The period during which the fluctuation icon is displayed is longer than that in the case where the fluctuation icon is erased by a smaller number of times than the number of times per one special figure fluctuation game. Thereby, although the number of times of erasure of the variation icon is large, the total display period can be lengthened, and the player can be aware of the variation of the variation icon.

<Display example 6 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a display example 6 of the change icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols on the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 2 and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “white” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 and “blue” is displayed. Is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2, and the special figure changing display area 208s0 is not displayed. In this example, the “white” hold icon has an initial value (default value), and the special map is changing only when the hold icon is a hold icon other than the initial value (in this example, a hold icon other than “white”). A corresponding variation icon is displayed in the display area 208s0.

  As shown in FIGS. 7B to 7D, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 Since the decorative symbol is displayed in the symbol display area and the number of the special figure 1 variable games held is reduced from 2 to 1, the “blue” hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208s1 and an erase animation that gradually deletes the “white” hold icon 1 displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, The moving animation for moving the holding icon 1 of “white” to the special figure changing display area 208s0 is not performed. As shown in FIG. 10C, the moving animation of the “blue” hold icon 2 and the erase animation of the “white” hold icon 1 may be overlapped before and after the same display area.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5E, the main control unit 300 displays the stop of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the decorative design in the symbol display area. Stop display of. Further, as shown in FIGS. 5F to 5I, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display area and displays them in the first special figure hold display area 208s1. After performing the moving animation for moving the “blue” hold icon 1 to the special-fluctuating display area 208s0, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area as shown in FIGS. At the same time, an erasing animation for gradually erasing the “blue” fluctuation icon displayed in the special figure fluctuation display area 208s0 is performed.

  It should be noted that the time for the erased animation of the fluctuation icon (the time for erasing the fluctuation icon shown in (i) to (l) in the figure) is the duration of the erased animation for the initial hold icon (a (a) to (c) in the figure. ) Is set longer than the time for deleting the hold icon shown in FIG. Further, in this example, only when the hold icon is a hold icon other than the initial value, the corresponding change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The change icon is displayed only when the hold icon changes (for example, when it changes from “white” to “blue”), or the change icon is also displayed when the hold icon does not change. The display time of the variable icon may be shortened compared to the case where the hold icon changes. That is, the first hold icon (for example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold 1) and the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold 2) are compared, and when both are different, What is necessary is just to change the display time, display mode, etc. of the fluctuation | variation icon corresponding to a 1st pending | holding icon.

<Display example 7 of fluctuation icon and hold icon>
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a display example 7 of the change icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the decorative symbols on the symbol display area. Since the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 3, and the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is 0, the hold icon 1 of “white” is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and “white” is displayed. Hold icon 2 is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2, “blue” hold icon 3 is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208 s 3, and a change icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208 s 0. It is not in the state. In this example, the display positions of the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are changed at a predetermined timing.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the special figure is in a probable state based on the pre-read information received from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts a pre-read notice effect based on the pre-read. At the same time, the symbol display area is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special symbol changing display region 208s0 and the first special symbol hold display region 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display region 208s4 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to the lower right. In this example, the special figure changing display area 208s0 is moved to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first special figure reservation display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure reservation display area 208s4 are moved downward in this order in the vertical direction. They are arranged side by side on top. In addition, the display areas of the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are made smaller than before the movement. That is, the position and size of the special figure changing display area 208s0 and the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 are changed, and the moving direction of the hold icon is changed from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. I am letting.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 7B to 7C, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub control part 400 displays the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area, and since the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has decreased from 2 to 1, the “white” hold icon displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 1 is performed to move to the special figure changing display area 208s0.

  In addition, after completing the pre-reading notice effect in FIG. 6I, the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. The fourth special figure hold display area 208s4 is moved to the original position (position shown in FIG. 4A) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display of the change icon and the erase animation are continued.

<Display of change icon and hold icon 8>
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a display example 8 of the change icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. Since the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 2 and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, the “white” hold icon 1 is displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1, and “thousand boxes” The hold icon 2 is displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208s2, and the change icon is not displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. In this example, when a power interruption / recovery occurs, the hold icon is changed to a display mode different from that before power interruption / recovery.

  In FIG. 5B, power interruption occurs and power is restored in FIG. 4C. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 displays an image after power is supplied. Since a predetermined activation time is required until it becomes possible, the first sub-control unit 400 waits for activation of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power is supplied until the production control can be started. Time is required, and characters such as “Please wait for a while during recovery” are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the preparation time elapses.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 300 has a shorter preparation time until the game control can be started after the power is supplied than the first sub control unit 400 that controls the decorative symbol display device 208. The game control is started before the control unit 400 starts the production control. In this example, as shown in FIG. 4C, the first special control is started during the preparation time by the first sub control unit 400. The winning of the mouth 230 is detected, and the suspension of the special figure 1 variable game is increased from 2 to 3.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 starts production control after the preparatory period has elapsed, but does not hold the result of special figure 1 variable game at the time of power interruption, so as shown in FIG. In the symbol display area, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation (in this example, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” set as an initial value) is displayed. Also, even if a moving animation or an erasing animation of a hold icon or a variable icon is performed before power interruption / recovery, any animation is not performed because the situation is not maintained at the time of power interruption.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5E, the main control unit 300 performs the variable display of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold 1 in the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 In the symbol display area, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, since the first sub-control unit 400 does not hold the information on the hold icon or the variable icon at the time of the power interruption, the first sub-control unit 400 is based on the information on the number of holds (3 in this example) received from the main control unit 300. Predetermined display in the 1 special figure hold display area 208s1 to 3rd special figure hold display area 208s3 (in this example, "?" Display. Although the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is 3, it corresponds to each hold Display that the display mode of the hold icon to be determined is unconfirmed).

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 5F, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the third special figure hold display area 208s3 to be triggered by the decrease in the number of special figure 1 variable games held from 3 to 2. A moving animation for moving the displayed “?” Hold icon 2 in the direction of the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2 and a “?” Hold icon 2 displayed in the second special figure hold display area 208 s 2 are displayed. A moving animation that moves in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208s1 and a moving animation that moves the hold icon 1 of “?” Displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208s1 to the special figure changing display area 208s0. And the “?” Hold icon 1 is deleted, and at the same time the “white” change icon is displayed in the special figure change display area 208s0.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 11H to 11I, the first sub-control unit 400 holds the second special figure hold in response to the decrease in the number of special figure 1 variable games held from 2 to 1. A moving animation for moving the hold icon 2 of “?” Displayed in the display area 208 s 2 in the direction of the first special figure hold display area 208 s 1 and “?” Displayed in the first special figure hold display area 208 s 1. A moving animation for moving the hold icon 1 to the special figure changing display area 208s0 is performed, and the “?” Hold icon 1 is deleted, and at the same time, a “blue” changing icon is displayed in the special figure changing display area 208s0. In this example, since the first sub-control unit 400 does not hold the information on the scenario of the hold icon at the time of power failure, the display mode of the variable icon is determined according to the scenario having the information with the lowest reliability of the big hit among the scenarios. It is configured to do.

<Display of change icon and hold icon 9>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a display example 9 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In the state shown in FIG. 5A, the main control unit 300 displays the stop of the special figure 1 on the first special figure display device 212, and the first sub-control part 400 displays the “swing” of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area. "Change" is performed, and after waiting for a change stop command from the main control unit 300, execution of the decorative symbol stop display and change icon deletion animation is started. In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 cannot receive the change stop command from the main control unit 300 for some reason, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the change icon erase animation after a predetermined time. Configured to start execution.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 starts a timer set at a predetermined time at the timing shown in FIG. 5A and the timer times out, as shown in FIGS. The animation for erasing the fluctuation icon is performed without waiting for the reception of the fluctuation stop command from the control unit 300. Note that “fluctuation fluctuation” continues to be executed because no fluctuation stop command has been received.

  With such a configuration, even when the first sub-control unit 400 misses the variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is understood that the variation of the special figure is stopped by deleting the variation icon. In addition, it is disadvantageous that the player progresses the game with some troubles by giving the player a sense of incongruity by continuing to display “fluctuation fluctuation” even after the fluctuation icon is deleted. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation.

<Display of change icon and hold icon 10>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a display example 10 of the variation icon and the hold icon. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a display area 208s0, a first special figure hold display area 208s1 to a fourth special figure hold in the display area. When a predetermined condition is satisfied without displaying the display area 208s4, the display area is entirely displayed as shown in FIGS.

  Here, when a specific lottery result is derived by pre-reading or jackpot determination, or when the production mode is changed based on the player's operation, the number of fluctuations of the special figure reaches the predetermined number. In such a case, a case where the production mode is selected by lottery and a specific production mode is won by the lottery is included.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above is a start information storage unit (for example, RAM 308) that can store start information (for example, a random value) generated based on the game ball entering the start area. And determination unit for acquiring the start information stored in the start information storage unit, determining whether or not to determine the result based on the acquired start information and the gaming state when the start information is acquired, and deriving the result of the determination (For example, special figure 1 lottery process, special figure 2 related lottery process) and after the symbol variation display, the symbol mode (for example, special figure A to special figure L) corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) for performing the symbol variation display to be performed, and the special display state is controlled after the specific symbol pattern is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. You Game state control means (for example, special figure 1 state update process, special figure 2 state update process), prefetch means (for example, prefetch process) capable of prefetching start information stored in the start information storage means, decoration A decorative symbol display means (for example, a decorative symbol variation display that performs a decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display area) that can stop and display the decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect after starting the variation of the symbol (for example, A game machine comprising a decorative symbol display device 208) and an effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the decorative symbol display means, wherein the effect control means includes the start information Whether or not the success / failure determination means derives a specific determination result corresponding to the prefetching result of the prefetching means before execution of the symbol variation display based on the starting information stored in the storage means The pre-notification for performing the advance notice can be executed, and the pre-reading means outputs a first win / no-go type (for example, the go / no-go information in FIG. 16B shown in FIG. 16B) and the second as the pre-read result of the start information. The success / failure type (for example, the success / failure type information of FIG. 2 shown in FIG. 16 (b)) can be derived, and the effect control means has the prefetch result obtained by prefetching the start-up information by the prefetch means as the first result. In the case of the rejection type, it is possible to execute a first notice that suggests the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the starting information, and the pre-reading result obtained by pre-reading the starting information by the pre-reading means is the second winning / notifying In the case of the type, it is possible to execute a second notice that is not related to the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information (for example, in the case of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 24B). , "1 + SP reach A" In the case of the special figure 2, the “thunder” hold icon shown in FIG. 24 (a) is displayed and the jackpot is displayed. It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above embodiment, the first notice and the second notice can be notified according to the type of success / failure, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

  Further, the number of the first notices that can be selected by the effect control means may be larger than the number of the second notices.

  With such a configuration, since many first notices indicating the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information are performed, the player's willingness to play may be increased.

  Further, the success / failure determination means can execute the determination of success / failure based on the acquired start information and a gaming state when the start information is acquired, and the first success / failure type (for example, big hit) is the start start Regardless of the gaming state when the information is acquired by the success / failure determination means, the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means becomes the first game result (for example, big hit), and the second success / failure type (for example, high-precision time big hit) In the case of low probable time, the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means is the first game result or the second game result (for example, missed) according to the game state when the start / failure determination means acquires the start information. When the prefetching result of the prefetching means is the second type of success / failure and the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means is likely to be the second game result, It may be capable of executing a second notice informing.

  With such a configuration, prefetching notices that are not related to the content of the change are performed when the time is not accurate, so that the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The game control means may be in any one of a plurality of game states including at least a first state (for example, a non-probability change state) and a second state (for example, a probability change state) more advantageous than the first state. The gaming state can be controlled, and the second winning / failing type (for example, the high-accuracy time big hit and the low-probability time lag) is the gaming state when the winning determination means acquires the starting information. In this case, the first game result may be obtained, and the second game result may be obtained when the game state is the second state.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the interest of the game table can be enhanced.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. The notice notification based on the third failure type may include a notice notice having a reliability of 100%. In the case of the first success / failure type, a notice is made based on the variation type, and in the case of the second success / failure type, a notice is made based on the symbol type, and the variation type may be larger than the symbol type. In addition, the first notice notification may be able to notify the notice of the number of pseudo-reams.

  Further, when the gaming state changes according to the number of times of change, the pre-reading notice may be prohibited for a predetermined period before the gaming state changes. In addition, when the gaming state changes according to the number of times of change, pre-reading notification corresponding to the changed gaming state may be performed for the starting information that changes after the gaming state changes.

  Further, only non-electric support may be prefetched only for special figure 1, and special support may be prefetched only for special figure 2. Further, in the case of the second winning / failing type, the winning symbol, the losing symbol, and the winning variation type may be transmitted to the sub. Also, in the case of big hit with high probability and out of low probability, only the big hit variation type may be transmitted to the sub.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is capable of controlling the effect means and the effect means (for example, the effect device 260) including at least display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display. An effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect control means controls the display means to hold predetermined game information (for example, a special figure variable game on hold). Number) can be displayed in a first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area), and the effect control means controls the display means to display the predetermined game information in the first display. The game machine is characterized in that it can be displayed in a second display (for example, a normal hold display displayed in a normal hold display area) different from the one display.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above embodiment, the game information can be displayed in the first display and the second display, so that the player's interest may be improved. Conventionally, a player progresses a game while paying attention to display means (liquid crystal display device) arranged in the approximate center of the game board, but the hold display (LED) controlled by the main control unit is a game separated from the display means. Since it is arranged at the end of the board, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player who is paying attention to the display means to confirm the number of holds. In order to solve such a problem, there is a game machine configured to display hold on the display means, but depending on the contents of the presentation performed on the display means, the hold display may not be performed. In order to do this, the line of sight must be greatly diverted from the display means, which has diminished the fun of the game. The present invention may be able to solve such conventional problems and improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the effect control means controls the effect means to produce a specific effect (the effect of moving the second effect movable body 225 up and down as shown in FIG. 34 (a), as shown in FIG. 34 (b). Further, an effect of opening and closing the shielding device 246 to the left and right, a reach effect as shown in FIGS. 55 (e) to 55 (f) can be executed, and the first is performed when the specific effect is executed. May be reduced (a part of the special hold display is covered, the special hold display disappears, the special hold display is reduced, or the special hold display moves).

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to confirm the game information on the second display while enjoying a specific effect.

  Also, a game board (for example, the game board 200) that forms a game area in which the game ball can roll, and a predetermined entry area (for example, the first special figure start) provided in the game board and into which the game ball can enter. Mouth 230, second special figure start opening 232) and when a predetermined start condition including entry of a game ball into the entry area is satisfied (for example, first special figure start opening 230 or second special figure start opening When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered 232, the design pattern corresponding to the determination result (for example, Special Drawing A to Special Drawing L) is stopped after starting the change of the predetermined design. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the symbol display means to be held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The number of holds, which is the number of rights for the symbol variation display, can be displayed. Hold number display means (for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220) and control means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400) capable of controlling the hold number display means. ), And the effect control means controls the display means to start the decoration symbol variation and then stops the decoration symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, symbol display) The display of the decorative pattern in the area) can be displayed, and the game information is the number of holds, the display position of the first display, the display position of the second display, and the number of holds display means Among the positions, the display position of the first display (for example, the special hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 25C) is the display position of the decorative pattern change display (for example, the symbol display area shown in FIG. 25C). 208a-208 ) And the second display position (for example, the normal hold display area 208h shown in FIG. 25C) is the second closest position to the decorative symbol variation display position. Yes, the display position of the holding number display means (for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 25C) is the third closest to the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. The distance between the display position of the first display and the display position of the second display is shorter than the distance between the display position of the second display and the position of the hold number display means. Also good.

  With such a configuration, since the first display is close to the decorative symbol variation display, there is a case where the number of holds can be confirmed by visually recognizing the first display without greatly diverting the line of sight from the decorative symbol variation display. is there. In addition, since the display positions of the first display and the second display are close, even if the first display becomes difficult to visually recognize, the number of holds can be confirmed by visually recognizing the second display without greatly deviating the line of sight. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of controlling the display means to display the first display and the second display at the same time.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to confirm the game information on the other display even if the visibility of one is reduced.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display on the same display means.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily move the line of sight to the other display even if the visibility of one of the players decreases.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the special hold display is larger than (1) the normal hold display, and (2) the normal hold display. (3) Hide at least a part of the decorative pattern, (4) It is more likely to be harder to see than normal hold display, (5) Easier to pre-read notification than normal hold display Or any of them.

  In addition, the switching between the normal hold display and the special hold display is performed together with the change of the production mode every predetermined number of fluctuations. However, it may be performed when other conditions are satisfied. , When starting a moving object effect, when ending a moving object effect, when a big hit, when a gaming state changes, when returning after turning off the power, a player operates a predetermined operating means In this case, it may be a case where an operating means that can be operated only by a game shop clerk is operated.

  The effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display at the same time. In this case, since the first display and the second display are displayed at the same time, it is possible to make it easier for the player to convey the game information and to improve the interest of the player. In addition, since the first display and the second display are performed by the control by the effect control means, the display timing can be easily adjusted and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first display may be larger than the second display, and the possibility that the second game information different from the game information is notified may be higher than the second display. In addition, the first display may be difficult to visually recognize when at least a part is shielded by a specific effect, and is difficult to visually recognize by shielding at least a part of the specific effect. It may be a thing. In addition, the first display may be able to be displayed in all the plurality of effect modes, or may be displayed only in one effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. Further, the first display may be displayed in front of the symbol variation display or the notice display.

  The first display may be one in which at least one of the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold becomes difficult to visually recognize. The first display may be such that only the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold among the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold may be difficult to visually recognize. The first display may be such that only the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold out of the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold may be difficult to view. The first display may be such that the display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold and the display corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are always difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, the second display may not notify the second game information. Further, the second game information may be reserved pre-reading information, or may be advance notice information of symbol variation display. Further, the second display may not be shielded by a specific effect.

  The first display may be an animation display, and the second display may not be an animation display. In addition, one of the first display and the second display may have one possibility that at least a part is shielded by the game ball than the other. Moreover, the other of the first display and the second display may not be shielded by the game ball. In addition, the first display may be displayed in a reduced direction different from the direction in which the second display decreases when the number of holds decreases, and the second display is displayed when the number of holds decreases. The decrease display may be performed in the same direction as the decrease display direction. In addition, the first display and the second display may be displayed so as to decrease toward the specific point when the number of holdings decreases, and one of the first display and the second display is The display related to the symbol variation display may be performed.

In addition, during a specific period, the first display may be difficult for the player to see and the second display may not be difficult for the player to view, and the reach effect, the jackpot effect, the short time effect, the moving object operation effect It may be during any production period. In addition, the game information may be any of the number of jackpots, the number of profits obtained during one jackpot, or a plurality of jackpots or jackpot games.

In addition, the specific effect may be an effect related to the decorative symbol variation display. The display means includes a first display means and a second display means, wherein the first display is displayed by the first display means and the second display is displayed by the second display means. There may be. Further, the first display means may be an image display device, and the second display means may be a light emitting display device.

  Further, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the effect mode is shifted to one of the plurality of effect modes, and the second display is the first number of effect modes among the plurality of effect modes. The first display can be displayed in a second number of production modes less than the first number or more than the first number or the same as the first number. There may be.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is capable of controlling the effect means and the effect means (for example, the effect device 260) including at least display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display. An effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect control means controls the display means to hold predetermined game information (for example, a special figure variable game on hold). Number) can be displayed in a first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area), and the effect control means controls the display means to display the predetermined game information in the first display. The display can be displayed by a second display different from the first display (for example, a normal hold display displayed in the normal hold display area), and the effect control means can display the predetermined condition (for example, FIG. a), (b) As shown, the display can be changed from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one of mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode). It is a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game by either the first display or the second display, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are cases where it is possible.

  Also, a game board (for example, the game board 200) that forms a game area in which the game ball can roll, and a predetermined entry area (for example, the first special figure start) provided in the game board and into which the game ball can enter. Mouth 230, second special figure start opening 232) and when a predetermined start condition including entry of a game ball into the entry area is satisfied (for example, first special figure start opening 230 or second special figure start opening When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered 232, the design pattern corresponding to the determination result (for example, Special Drawing A to Special Drawing L) is stopped after starting the change of the predetermined design. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the symbol display means to be held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The number of holds, which is the number of rights for the symbol variation display, can be displayed. Hold number display means (for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220) and control means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400) capable of controlling the hold number display means. ), And the effect control means controls the display means to start the decoration symbol variation and then stops the decoration symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, symbol display) The display of the decorative symbols performed in the area) can be displayed, and the game information may be the number of reservations.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game due to a difference in the display of the number of holds, and the player's interest may be improved.

  The display position of the first display overlaps at least partly with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display, and the display position of the second display overlaps with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. It may not be.

  With such a configuration, in the first display, the number-of-holds display can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, and the player's discomfort due to the losing design stop can be reduced, and the feeling of the next design fluctuation is felt. May be able to be switched. In the second display, the player's consciousness may be directed to the decorative design.

  The first display may have a larger display area than the second display.

  With such a configuration, the first display can make the hold number display more conspicuous than the second display, so it can reduce the player's discomfort due to loss of symbol stop, and against the next symbol variation Sometimes you can change your mind.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display on the same display means.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily move the line of sight to the other display even if the visibility of one of the players decreases.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the first display may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the decorative design. It may be configured. Further, a special hold display may be displayed during non-electric support to cover the decorative symbol, and a normal hold display may be displayed during electric support to not cover the decorative symbol. Further, the reserved display for special figure 1 may not cover the decorative symbol, and the reserved display for special figure 2 may cover the decorative symbol.

  In addition, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to a result of the determination of success / failure after starting a variation of a predetermined symbol, and a predetermined hold A holding number display means capable of displaying a holding number, which is the number of rights to perform the variable display on the symbol display means held when a condition is satisfied, a control means capable of controlling the holding number display means, and a predetermined Display means capable of executing the display, and display control means capable of controlling the display means, wherein the display control means controls the display means to start the variation of the decorative design. The decorative design variation display can be executed to stop and display the decorative design corresponding to the display, and the display control means controls the display means to display the first display indicating the number of reservations and the second indicating the number of reservations. Can be displayed The display control means can change the display from one of the first display and the second display to the other when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the first display The visibility of at least a part of the variable display may be reduced.

  In this case, the player can recognize that the game has changed due to the difference in the visibility of the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, in the first display, the display of the number of reservations can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, the player's discomfort due to the stop of the lost design can be reduced, and the feeling can be switched for the next design variation. There is a case. In the second display, the player's consciousness may be directed to the decorative design.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is configured such that, when the success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit (for example, the main control unit 300) that can execute at least determination of success / failure and the symbol variation condition are satisfied. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing at least the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing the variation. When a hold storage condition is established, a hold storage means (for example, RAM 308) that can store at least start information as a hold, and when a hold display condition is established, an icon corresponding to the hold (eg, a hold icon) Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can be displayed at least as a hold icon displayed in the special hold display area) and the display means. And a display control means that can be controlled (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), wherein the display control means displays the icon in accordance with the symbol variation display after the symbol variation display is started. Can be displayed as a variation icon corresponding to (for example, a variation icon displayed in the special region variation display area), and the display control means includes a first variation icon that includes the variation icon when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the display can be changed from one of the display and the second display not including the variation icon to the other.

  In the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, the player can recognize that the game has changed depending on the presence or absence of the change icon together with the number of holds, and may be able to improve the interest of the player. Further, there are cases where the game is sharpened by changing the display indicating the number of holds. In addition, since the variation icon is related to the symbol variation display, when the variation icon is displayed, the player can predict the content of the symbol variation display with the content of the variation icon, and the variation icon is displayed. If not, the player may be able to concentrate by the symbol variation display.

  Further, the display control means is capable of executing at least a predetermined notice when the notice condition is satisfied, and the display control means is capable of displaying the variable icon as the notice. Also good.

  With such a configuration, the value of the variable icon can be increased and the player's interest can be improved in some cases.

  In addition, when the display changes from the second display to the first display, the number of the hold icon and the variation icon combined is the same in the second display and the first display. Also good.

With such a configuration, there is a case where the player can have an illusion as if the holding is not reduced, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the display control means can control the display means to display any one of a plurality of background effects including at least a first background effect and a second background effect behind the decorative symbol variable display. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the background effect is switched from the first background effect to the second background effect.

  With such a configuration, it may be easier for the player to recognize that the background effect has changed, and the player's interest may be improved.

  Further, the change icon may end display before the symbol change display ends.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the player's consciousness can be directed to the decorative symbol variation display by ending the fourth display first.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the predetermined condition is established when the variation display of the decorative symbol shifts to the reach effect. Alternatively, it may be established when the decorative symbol variation display shifts from the reach effect to the stop display. Further, a predetermined condition may be established when a big win is won during the display of one of the first display and the second display and the big win ends. Further, the control means can control the gaming state to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state in which the first gaming state and the first gaming state have different degrees of advantage. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the gaming state is switched from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

  In addition, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect (for example, special symbol A to special symbol L) corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure after starting the variation of the predetermined symbol is displayed. The right to perform the variable display by the executable symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the symbol display means held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The holding number display means (for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220) that can display the holding number that is the number of the holdings, and the control means that can control the holding number display means (for example, main A control unit 300), display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display, and display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the display means. The display control means is the table It is possible to execute a decorative symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, a decorative symbol variation display performed in the symbol display area) after controlling the means and starting the variation of the decorative symbol. The display control means controls the display means to display a first display indicating the number of holds (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area) and a second display indicating the number of holds (for example, A normal hold display displayed in the normal hold display area can be displayed, and the display control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. The display can be changed from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one mode to the other in mode B (princess mode), and the first display Is the same number of thirds Display (for example, a hold icon displayed in the special hold display area), and a fourth display (for example, a change icon displayed in the special figure changing display area) related to the decorative symbol change display being displayed. It may be included separately from the three displays.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the change has occurred in the game depending on the presence or absence of the fourth display together with the number of holds, and may be able to improve the interest of the player. Further, there are cases where the game is sharpened by changing the display indicating the number of holds. In addition, since the fourth display is related to the decorative symbol variation display, when the fourth display is displayed, the player may expect the content of the decorative symbol variation display based on the content of the fourth display. Yes, when the fourth display is not displayed, the player may be able to concentrate by the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment is capable of controlling the effect means and the effect means (for example, the effect device 260) including at least display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display. An effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein the effect control means controls the display means to hold predetermined game information (for example, a special figure variable game on hold). Number) can be displayed in a first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in a special hold display area), and the effect control means controls the display means to display the predetermined game information in the first display. The display can be displayed by a second display different from the first display (for example, a normal hold display displayed in the normal hold display area), and the effect control means can display the predetermined condition (for example, FIG. a), (b) As shown, the display can be changed from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one of mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode). The effect control means is capable of displaying at least a prefetch notice on the display means when the prefetch notice condition is satisfied, and the effect control means is configured to display the first display on the first display. A gaming machine characterized in that the pre-reading notice can be executed.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game by either the first display or the second display, thereby improving the interest of the player. There are cases where it is possible.

  Also, a game board (for example, the game board 200) that forms a game area in which the game ball can roll, and a predetermined entry area (for example, the first special figure start) provided in the game board and into which the game ball can enter. Mouth 230, second special figure start opening 232) and when a predetermined start condition including entry of a game ball into the entry area is satisfied (for example, first special figure start opening 230 or second special figure start opening When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered 232, the design pattern corresponding to the determination result (for example, Special Drawing A to Special Drawing L) is stopped after starting the change of the predetermined design. The symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214) capable of executing the symbol variation display to be displayed, and the symbol display means to be held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The number of holds, which is the number of rights for the symbol variation display, can be displayed. Hold number display means (for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220) and control means (for example, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400) capable of controlling the hold number display means. ), And the effect control means controls the display means to start the decoration symbol variation and then stops the decoration symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol aspect (for example, symbol display) The display of the decorative symbols performed in the area) can be displayed, and the game information may be the number of reservations.

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game due to a difference in the display of the number of holds, and the player's interest may be improved.

  The display position of the first display overlaps at least partly with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display, and the display position of the second display overlaps with the display position of the decorative symbol variation display. It may not be.

  With such a configuration, in the first display, the number-of-holds display can be made more conspicuous than the decorative design, and the player's discomfort due to the losing design stop can be reduced, and the feeling of the next design fluctuation is felt. May be able to be switched. In the second display, the player's consciousness may be directed to the decorative design.

  The first display may have a larger display area than the second display.

  With such a configuration, the first display can make the hold number display more conspicuous than the second display, so it can reduce the player's discomfort due to loss of symbol stop, and against the next symbol variation Sometimes you can change your mind.

  Further, the effect control means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display on the same display means.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily move the line of sight to the other display even if the visibility of one of the players decreases.

  The configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment. For example, a plurality of game balls enter the start area within a predetermined time and the game balls enter. Even when the corresponding notice is given, the notice may be displayed in the second display without specifying the order in which the reserved rights subject to the notice are used.

  In addition, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect (for example, special symbol A to special symbol L) corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure after starting the variation of the predetermined symbol is displayed. The right to perform the variable display by the executable symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the symbol display means held when a predetermined holding condition is satisfied. The holding number display means (for example, the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220) that can display the holding number that is the number of the holdings, and the control means that can control the holding number display means (for example, main A control unit 300), display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a predetermined display, and display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of controlling the display means. The display control means is the table Control means can execute a notice about the result of the determination of success / failure before the symbol mode by the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the display control unit controls the display unit to decorate A decorative symbol variation display (for example, a decorative symbol variation display performed in a symbol display area) for stopping and displaying a decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect after execution of a symbol variation can be executed, and the display control means , A first display (for example, a special hold display displayed in the special hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 28A) and a second display showing the hold number by controlling the display means (the special hold display area 208j shown in FIG. 28A). For example, a special hold display displayed in the special hold display area 208h shown in FIG. 28B can be displayed, and the display control means can display a predetermined condition (for example, FIGS. 26A and 26B). ) Thus, the display can be changed from one of the first display and the second display to the other in the case of transition from one of mode A (dono mode) to mode B (princess mode)). The first display can include a notice display indicating the advance notice, the second display can include a notice display indicating the advance notice, and the first display includes Including the same number of third displays (for example, a hold icon displayed in a special hold display area), and the first display specifies the order of digestion of the held rights to be subject to the advance notice. The notice display can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 28A, an image imitating a snowman is displayed in the third special figure hold display area 208j3 of the special figure hold display area 208j), The second indication is when the notice indication is included. The notice display can be displayed without specifying the order in which the reserved rights subject to notice are specified (for example, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), a snowman is imitated in the special figure hold display area 208m) On the image, a hold icon in which a number indicating the number of hold of the special figure variable game is superimposed may be displayed).

  With such a configuration, the player can recognize that a change has occurred in the game depending on whether or not the pre-order pending digestion order is specified, and the player's interest may be improved. Further, in the second display, since the display is performed without specifying the digest order of the pre-read hold, the player can concentrate on the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest may be improved. Further, in the first display, the digestion order of the pre-read hold is specified and displayed, so that the player can expect the specified hold decoration pattern change display, and the player's game interest can be improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  The second display may include characters indicating the number of reservations.

  With such a configuration, in the second display, the number of holds is displayed, so that the player can expect the decorative display variation display of the specified hold and improve the interest of the player's game. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the display area of the second display may be smaller than that of the first display.

  With such a configuration, since the second display is small, the player can concentrate on the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest may be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment can determine whether or not the game ball can be determined on the condition that the game ball has entered the start area (for example, the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232). If the determination means (for example, special figure 1 related lottery process, special figure 2 related lottery process) and the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means are a specific success / failure determination result (for example, a big hit), A second control state (for example, a probable change) having a second advantage that differs from the first advantage from a first control state (for example, a non-probability variable state) in which the advantage is a first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, special figure 1 state update process, special figure 2 state update process), a predetermined closed state, and a predetermined game ball winning that is easier than the closed state. Open / closed state can be changed from one of the open states to the other Variable winning means (for example, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235) and an abnormality determining means (for example, updating the winning opening counter shown in FIG. 14) for determining an abnormality when a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. Processing) and a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a speaker, a lamp) capable of performing a predetermined notification, wherein the second control state includes the variable prize winning means Satisfaction of at least one of the following conditions: elapse of a first time (for example, maximum opening time) from entering a predetermined open state or entry of a first number (for example, maximum number of balls) of game balls to the variable winning means Including a jackpot gaming state (for example, jackpot game) in which a round game state in which the variable winning means is set to the predetermined closed state is performed by a second number (for example, 16, 4, 2), The notification means A first notification (for example, an over-winning notification) is made when more than the first number of game balls enter the variable winning means during a game state, and the abnormality determination means The gaming machine is characterized in that an abnormality is determined when the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning means reaches a third number (for example, the abnormality determination number shown in FIG. 8A).

  According to the pachinko machine according to the above-described embodiment, there is a case where a normal player who happens to win excessively during one round does not feel uncomfortable. Moreover, since an abnormality is not determined for each round, an unauthorized person may be alerted.

  The third number may be a sum of the first number and a predetermined number.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where fraudulent acts can be prevented without causing an unpleasant feeling to a normal player who happens to be over-winned during one round.

  Moreover, the said alerting | reporting means may perform the 2nd alerting | reporting (for example, output of an abnormality occurrence signal) different from said 1st alerting | reporting, when the said abnormality determination means determines with the said abnormality.

  With such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected, the abnormality can be reliably transmitted, and an optimal response may be performed.

  Further, the notification unit may give priority to the second notification over the first notification.

With such a configuration, when an abnormality is detected, the abnormality can be reliably transmitted by the second notification, and a quick response may be performed.
[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 for launching the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a channel for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 64) by the player's operation. A button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is passed, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 67). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, and the like need to be changed for each model, and thus are provided on the back of the game board 200. The outer frame 102 is provided for common use.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball in the ordinary figure starting port 228, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, is as follows. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 235, these general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 66, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 66, one 4th symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is provided (two in total). There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the left side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 67) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors A sensor circuit 428 that outputs to the basic circuit 402 and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of the reading data, etc. VRAM436, connects the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, frequency, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 68A to 68D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 68 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special Figure 1. In FIG. 68 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, and is a special diagram high probability normal diagram low probability state. “Special figure C” is 2R and does not shift to the time reduction state.

  “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  In FIG. 68 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are used as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 1, whereas “Stop Special” of Special Figure 2 is “Special Figure”. Four types of special figures, “a” to “special d”, are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where a difference can be provided between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable. In this example, the advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1. For example, the jackpot of special figure 1 includes a latent probability change (special figure C) in which almost no ball is obtained, whereas the jackpot of special figure 2 does not include a latent probability change.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  Then, the 15R special jackpot for "Special Figure A", the 15R big jackpot for "Special Figure B", the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure a", the 8R special jackpot for "Special Figure b", and the 8R big jackpot for "Special Figure c" In the case of notification, the combination of symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped. indicate. When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called “latency probability change (hidden probability change)” of “special drawing C” or the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” “1-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 68C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 68 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 68 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next, in addition to being set in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  When a winning is made at the general figure start opening 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as a normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234, 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either one of the winning symbols (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 68 (d)) or the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 68 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of an incorrect selection, the flag for a normal figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, special figure prefetching processing is performed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 fluctuation game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has flags such as a 16R big hit flag, a 15R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, an outlier flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and an ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag. It is prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on 68B, when the special figure a, 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Moreover, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 16 rounds or 8 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and starts at the timing when it is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process to be performed, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed is set. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. Special figure B when figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure C when 2R big hit flag is on Special figure D when small hit flag is on Special figure D when special flag is on, Special figure when off flag is on E The 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in each mode, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to E. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. Further, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 73A to 73D described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the determined success / failure determination result, and the like, a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 11A described later). ) And (b)) are used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) shown in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (see FIGS. 75 and 13 described later).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special chart prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2 The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.

  FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 72B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 72B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 72 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group to be described later, etc. The information may be determined in advance and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 73 to 76 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. 73 (a) to 73 (d) show an example of the determination table used for determining whether or not the lottery process is performed in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Yes. 73 (a) to 73 (d) are configured by items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “result of determination”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 73A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of big hit is about 1/399 (= 164). / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of determination of success / failure is high. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times, and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 73 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of determination of success / failure is high. As shown in FIG. 73 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 and the probability of big hit is 0. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 73 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  74 (a) and 74 (b) are examples of special figure determination tables used when determining stop symbols in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Show. The special figure determination tables shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b) are configured with items of “result of determination / non-acceptance”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol”. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value or special figure 1 random value. The range that can be taken by the special figure 2 random value and the special figure 1 random value in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  FIG. 74 (a) shows a special figure determination table for special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the special figure 1 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 25% for special figure A (15R special big hit) and 25% for special figure B (15R big hit). %, And special figure C (latency probability change) is 50%. The ratio of probability change jackpots (Special Figure A, Special Figure C) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability change probability is 75%. Moreover, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 50% for 15R and 50% for 2R.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one kind of small hit symbol in special figure 1, if the result of determining whether or not special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol, the stop symbol is special regardless of the special figure 1 random value. D is determined. Also, since there is only one type of missed symbol, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol E regardless of the special figure 1 random value. In FIG. 1, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided, and another symbol may be determined based on the result of random number lottery.

  FIG. 74B shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the special figure 2 variable game of this example, the distribution rate of each big hit symbol is 70% for special figure a (16R special big hit), and special figure b (8R special big hit) is 5%, and special figure c (8R big hit) is 25%. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figure a, special figure b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75% as in FIG. Further, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game is 70% for 16R and 30% for 8R.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one type of out-of-order symbol in special figure 2, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the stop symbol becomes special figure d regardless of the special figure 2 random value. It is determined. In FIG. 2, it is also possible to provide a plurality of different symbols and determine another symbol based on the result of random lottery.

  FIG. 75 shows an example of the timer number selection table. The timer number selection table is used when determining the timer number in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer number selection tables are provided, and one timer number selection table is selected based on various conditions such as the gaming state at the time of determination of success / failure and the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2. The In FIG. 75, only the timer number selection table for special figure 1 that is selected when the determination of success / failure is during non-electric support is shown.

  In the timer number selection table shown in FIG. 75, the variation timer (timer number) can be determined based on the stop symbol, the number of holds in FIG. 1 and the random number for determining the special diagram variation time. Here, the possible values of the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time in this example are 0 to 65535. When the stop symbol is special figure E, when the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 0, the timer number is determined as one of timers 3 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining special figure fluctuation time. When the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1 or more (1 to 3 in this example), the timer number is one of the timers 2 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 based on the random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time. It is determined. In this example, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the selection probability of each variable timer differs depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1, and the distribution of the variable timers also differs. For example, timer 2 can be selected when the number of holds is 1 or more, but is not selected when the number of holds is 0.

  As will be described later, the timers 6 to 22 are variable timers (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “variable timers greater than reach”) capable of executing effects of so-called reach or higher. In the table shown in FIG. 75, when the stop symbol is special figure E, the probability that a variation timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0 (reach occurrence probability) is about 1/8 (reach occurrence probability). = 8536/65536), and the probability that a variation timer of reach or higher is selected when the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 or more is approximately 1/32 (= 2036/65536). In this way, in this example, when the number of holdings is large (for example, when the number of holdings is 1 or more), the special figure variation is activated, and the reach occurrence probability due to the deviation fluctuation becomes lower as the number of holdings is larger. Yes.

  When the stop symbol is special figure A or special figure B, the timer numbers of timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, 18 to 22 are based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings of special figure 1. Decide on either. When the stop symbol is special figure C or special figure D, the timer number is determined by the timer 10 or 14 based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time regardless of the number of holdings in the special figure 1. Even in the case where the stop symbol is special figure A to special figure D, the selection probability and distribution of each variable timer may be varied depending on the number of holdings in special figure 1.

  FIG. 76 shows an example of the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer. As shown in FIG. 76, the timers 1 to 5 have a variation time of 2000 to 10000 ms, and belong to the timer group 1 (immediately a shift system). The timers 6 and 7 have a fluctuation time of 20000 to 45000 ms, and belong to the timer group 2 (expected small). The timers 8 to 10 have a fluctuating time of 15000 to 55000 ms and belong to the timer group 3 (small expectation: hit). The timers 11 to 13 have a fluctuation time of 70000 to 100000 ms and belong to the timer group 4 (expected: missed). The timers 14 and 15 have a fluctuation time of 80000 to 95000 ms and belong to the timer group 5 (expected: hit). The timers 16 and 17 have a fluctuation time of 120,000 to 150,000 ms, and belong to the timer group 6 (expected large: disappointing). The timers 18 to 22 have a fluctuation time of 105,000 to 300,000 ms and belong to the timer group 7 (expected large: hit).

  In this example, the timers 6 to 22 are reachable or more variable timers. Timers 1 to 7, 11 to 13, 16, and 17 are variation timers that are selected when the determination result of the variation is out of order, and timers 8 to 10, 14, 15, and 18 to 22 are It is a variation timer that is selected when the variation determination result is a win. When comparing variation timers that can execute the same effect type, the variation timer that is selected at the time of winning is more variable than the variation timer that is selected at the time of losing so that the winning effect can be executed after the symbol stop display. Is longer by a predetermined time (for example, 10,000 ms). For example, comparing the timer 6 and the timer 9 capable of producing a normal reach, the timer 9 selected at the time of winning has a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms longer than the timer 6 selected at the time of loss. In the special figure variable game in which the timer 6 is selected and the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the normal reach effect in the same manner is possible until immediately before the symbol stops, and in the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the symbol A predetermined winning game can be executed after the stop.

  Note that the timer number and the effect type do not necessarily correspond one-on-one, and a plurality of effect modes may be provided for one timer number. For example, when a certain timer is selected, in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, a determination based on a predetermined condition or a lottery using an effect random number is performed, You may make it select the production | presentation aspect performed with the change time of a timer from several production | presentation aspects. In addition, even if the timer numbers (variation times) are different, it may be possible to provide an effect type such that some aspects are common.

  Further, in this example, when the timers 6 to 22 are selected, an effect more than reach is executed, but whether or not an effect more than reach is executed does not necessarily depend on the timer number. . For example, the lottery for the timer number and the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the reach or higher effect may be performed independently. The lottery for determining whether or not to perform the reach or more may be performed by the main control unit 300 or the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 81. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 77A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 77C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 77 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing an example of the internal configuration of the ROM 406 and the VRAM 436 before image data is expanded in the VRAM 436. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 reads out the ROM 406 for storing the control program and the image data, the VRAM 436 for temporarily storing the image data, and the image data stored in the ROM 406. A VDP 434 that generates a display image using a storage area of the VRAM 436 and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 406 stores in advance image data such as compressed movie data (compressed moving image data) and texture data including still images. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 78, there are three types of movie data, movie data MVa for movie A, movie data MVb for movie B, movie data MVc for movie C, and a plurality of such as texture data T001 and texture data T002. Are stored in the ROM 406. In addition to these data, the ROM 406 previously stores control information including the resolution (image size) of movie data. In this example, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVa is 1280 × 960, the information indicating that the resolution of the movie data MVb is 1024 × 768, and the resolution of the movie data MVc is 800 × 600. And control information including the information indicating “” is stored in the ROM 406.

  The VRAM 436 includes a movie data expansion area MVE for temporarily storing (developing) movie data, a texture data expansion area TE for temporarily storing (developing) texture data, and a decorative symbol display device. A frame buffer 1 (FB1) and a frame buffer 2 (FB2) are provided for temporarily storing (developing) image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on 208. Note that the frame buffer 1 (FB1) and the frame buffer 2 (FB2) are configured so that one of a drawing area and a display area can be specified, and image data is developed in the frame buffer specified in the drawing area. By changing the designation from the drawing area to the display area, an image corresponding to the image data stored in the frame buffer designated in the display area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flow of image drawing processing when a movie A is reproduced and a texture image based on texture data is displayed superimposed on the movie A. When reproducing the movie A, the first sub-control unit 400 decompresses the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) corresponding to the movie A into a plurality of image data, and then decompresses the image data for each frame. It is transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) set in the VRAM 436. In the VRAM 436 of this example, in addition to the movie data development area MVE1, another movie data development area with different resolutions (for example, a movie data development area with a resolution of 1024 × 768 and a movie data development area with a resolution of 800 × 600). Area) is set, but the movie data development area MVE1 having the same resolution as the movie data MVa can be used, so that it is used preferentially. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a plurality of texture data stored in the ROM 406 (in this example, texture data T001 to T004 for displaying an animation in which a texture image (a hold icon or a change icon described later) rotates). Is transferred (expanded) to the texture data expanding area TE (not shown in FIG. 79). Here, the texture data T001 of this example corresponds to the texture image in the initial state, the texture data T002 corresponds to the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture data T003 is 180 clockwise from the initial state. Corresponding to the rotated texture image, the texture data T004 corresponds to the texture image rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state. In this example, the texture image is displayed as a moving image by animation using a plurality of texture data, but the texture image may be composed of movie data.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the frame buffer 1 (FB1) or the frame buffer of the VRAM 436 based on the movie data MVa transferred to the movie data development area MVE1 and the texture data transferred to the texture data development area TE. 2 (FB2), the image data and texture data information (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP 434. At this time, 1280 × 960 is designated as an image size to be extracted from the movie data development area MVE1 (resolution 1280 × 960) to the frame buffer, and all areas of the movie data MVa (resolution 1280 × 960) can be displayed.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 designates the entire area of the frame buffer in which the display image is formed and issues a drawing instruction. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the drawing instruction. As a result, an image corresponding to the movie data MVa and an image corresponding to the texture data are displayed on the decorative design display device 208. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 sequentially selects and indicates four types of texture data T001 to T004 in time series to the VDP 434, thereby expressing the motion (for example, rotation) of the texture image by animation. Can do. In addition, when displaying a plurality of animations by the same texture image (for example, animations in which a plurality of held icons having the same display mode are respectively rotated), the same texture data is selected for each animation in each frame. For example, a plurality of animations can be synchronized, and a plurality of animations can be made asynchronous by selecting different texture data for each animation in each frame. In this example, four types of texture data T001 to T004 are used to express the operation of the texture image, but three or less types or five or more types of texture data may be used.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a flow of image drawing processing when a texture image that appears from outside the display area (for example, below) and gradually moves to a predetermined position in the display area is displayed. The display position of the texture image is determined based on the arrangement coordinates of the texture data that the first sub-control unit 400 instructs the VDP 434. Therefore, by setting the arrangement coordinates of the texture data to gradually different values for each frame, the movement of the texture image can be displayed by animation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 80, in a state where two texture images are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area, the third texture image appears from below the display area, and two textures are displayed. An animation that gradually moves to the right next position of the image is displayed. In the leftmost frame in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436, the third texture image has a resolution of 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin (in this example, matches the range of the movie data MVa). Therefore, more than half of the texture image itself is arranged at a position protruding downward. Thereafter, in the middle frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a position above the position in the leftmost frame in the figure. Thereafter, in the rightmost frame in the figure, the third texture image is arranged at a predetermined position (the same height as the other two texture images) further above the position in the center frame in the figure.

  After forming a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 in each frame, the first sub-control unit 400 designates a range of resolution 1280 × 960 with the upper left corner of the frame buffer as the origin and issues a drawing instruction. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a third texture image (increased) in a state where two texture images (the previous hold icon) are arranged in the left-right direction at the lower end in the display area. A new hold icon) corresponding to the hold appears from below the display area, and an animation that gradually moves to the right adjacent position of the two texture images is displayed.

  As will be described later, in this example, a hold icon is displayed as an animation of a texture image. The number of held icons displayed is basically the same as the number of held special game games. Each hold icon can be prefetched about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, an animation that is executed when a hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), a previous hold is Due to the digestion, the order of the hold changes, and an animation executed when the hold icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left) (hereinafter, referred to as “pending icon moving animation”). ), Animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “change animation of the hold icon”), and corresponds to the change when the change starts Animation that is executed when the hold icon to be deleted is deleted Animation ”(sometimes referred to as“ animation ”), an animation that is executed when the priority icon on the priority side of the priority change machine is saved when the priority icon on the non-priority side is evacuated (hereinafter referred to as“ evacuation of the hold icon ”). There are cases where it is called “animation”). In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  Further, in this example, after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held. The variation icon and the hold icon may have the same mode. In addition, when a special figure variable game is started, a change icon displayed based on a hold corresponding to the special figure variable game is displayed as an erase animation of the hold icon displayed based on the hold corresponding to the special figure variable game. It may indicate the display of an icon. That is, an animation indicating that the role is switched from the hold icon to the change icon may be referred to as a hold icon erasure animation. In this case, the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon may be the same. That is, the erasure animation is an animation that particularly indicates that the function as the hold icon has been lost, and that indicates that the hold icon has been switched to the variable icon.

  As an animation of a mode related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is different from the hold icon display area when the hold is digested. Animation that moves to a region as a variable icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icon”) and animation that changes from the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the change icon (hereinafter “hold / change” It may be called “change animation between icons”). These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons. In addition, the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / change icons may be performed independently.

  FIG. 81 (a) shows an example (for example, default mode) of a standby animation of a holding icon corresponding to holding of the special figure 1 variable game. In this example, the texture image in the initial state corresponding to the texture data T001, the texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the clockwise rotation from the initial state corresponding to the texture data T003. The texture image rotated by 180 ° and the texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 and rotated by 270 ° clockwise from the initial state are sequentially displayed repeatedly. Each texture image has a circular outer shape with a predetermined color, and four characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle. ("Yatsushiro Shogun" pattern). Each character is arranged so that the center direction of the circle is downward. In the four texture images, only one of the characters “eight”, “dai”, “general”, and “army” is in the normal position (the vertical position is correct), and in the initial texture image “ “8” is the correct position. When the standby animation shown in FIG. 81 (a) is executed, the circular hold icon is visually recognized so as to always rotate clockwise around the center of the circle.

  FIG. 81 (b) shows another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, the texture image in the initial state, the texture image rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial state, the texture image rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial state, and the texture rotated 270 ° clockwise from the initial state Images are displayed in this order, and when the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image continues to be displayed. When this standby animation is executed, the circular hold icon is initially rotated only once, and thereafter, it is visually recognized to stop rotating and remain stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered part or all of the increase animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. Further, the increase animation and the standby animation are not necessarily related to each other.

  FIG. 81 (c) shows an example of a standby icon standby animation corresponding to the special figure 2 variable game hold. In this example, four texture images have a square outer shape. When this standby animation is executed, the square hold icon is visually recognized so as to continuously rotate in the clockwise direction around the center of the square. In this example, the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 have different shapes, but they may have the same shape. In addition, even a hold icon based on the same special figure may be displayed in a different manner according to a change in the gaming state. In addition, the display mode may be different even in the hold icon based on the same special figure and in the same gaming state.

  FIG. 81 (d) shows another example of the standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003 are repeatedly displayed in sequence. Each texture image matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani), and the states (for example, direction and pose) are different from each other. When this standby animation is executed, a predetermined character is visually recognized as walking in the left direction in the figure. Therefore, by executing this standby animation in combination with a moving animation for moving the hold icon to the left adjacent position, the player visually recognizes that the hold icon (character) moves to the left adjacent position. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, even if the same animation is executed in the standby animation and the moving animation, by changing the interval for switching the texture image in each animation, the other animation is fast-forwarded or slow-played for one animation. You may display as if.

  FIG. 81 (e) shows yet another example of a standby icon standby animation. In this example, for example, an initial texture image corresponding to the texture data T001, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T002, a texture image corresponding to the texture data T003, and a texture image corresponding to the texture data T004 are sequentially repeated. Is displayed. The texture images all match the character pattern similar to that shown in FIG. 81D, and the states (for example, orientation and pose) are different from each other. Since this standby animation uses four types of texture data in the same manner as the standby animation shown in FIGS. 81A, 81C, etc., the standby animation shown in FIGS. 81A, 81C, etc. It is possible to match the execution time (scale) of the animation for the period. Accordingly, even if the standby animation shown in FIG. 81 (e) is executed for some of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons and the standby animation shown in FIG. 81 (a) is executed for another hold icon, these standby icons are displayed. In some cases, animation can be executed synchronously. In the standby animation shown in FIG. 81 (e), after the four texture images are sequentially displayed and the initial texture image is displayed again, the initial texture image is displayed as in FIG. 81 (b). It may be displayed continuously.

  Here, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be the same before and after the display mode change. Thereby, the player can be caused to pay attention only to the display mode of the hold icon, and the player can be easily made aware of the change in the display mode.

  Moreover, when changing the display mode of the hold icon based on the prefetch result, the scale of the standby animation of the hold icon may be made different before and after the display mode change. In this case, the sense of incongruity may be caused by the change in the scale of the standby animation, and the player may be allowed to pay attention to the hold icon. Although the description of the standby animation has been made with the hold icon, the present invention is not limited to this and may be applied to the standby icon.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 90. FIG. 82A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 82A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 82B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 82 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the effect control process in step S809 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S1101 of the effect control process, the hold icon display control process is performed, and in the next step S1103, the variable icon display control process is performed. Details of the hold icon display control process and the variable icon display control process will be described later. Note that the hold icon display control process and the fluctuation icon display control process may be executed independently in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, or may be executed in common in FIG. 1 and FIG. You may do it. In step S1105 following step S1103, other effect control processing is performed.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an exemplary flow of a hold icon display control process. First, in step S1201 of the hold icon display control process, it is determined based on various commands such as the prefetch result information command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has increased. If it is determined that the number of holds has increased, the process proceeds to step S1203. If it is determined that the number of holds has not increased, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1203, a pending icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the hold icon change scenario lottery process, with reference to a hold icon display mode lottery table (FIGS. 86 to 89) to be described later, the number of hold of the special figure variable game, the timer group corresponding to the increased hold, and the hold icon display Based on the random number value for the mode lottery, a hold icon change scenario for the increased hold is determined by lottery. The on-hold icon change scenario is information representing a change in the display mode of the on-hold icon until the on-hold is consumed. For example, “On winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: blue” is expressed. . The display mode of the hold icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. If the timer group information corresponding to the increased hold cannot be acquired (for example, when prefetching is not executed), the display mode of the hold icon until the hold is consumed is set to the default “white”. Set.

  In step S 1205 following step S 1203, the determined hold icon change scenario is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 508. Here, the scenario storage area in the RAM 508 has the same number of storage areas as the number of reserves for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 (in this example, four for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2). Have. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) in FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the first hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the data (hold icon change scenario) in the storage area corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. The data in the storage area corresponding to 2 to 4 is moved up to the storage area corresponding to 1 to 3 and stored again.

  In step S1207 subsequent to step S1205, a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (including a process of setting an increase animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, it is determined whether a hold icon change condition is satisfied. The hold icon change condition is, for example, that a special figure variable game is started. In this example, it is determined that the hold icon change condition has been satisfied if it is the timing at which a command indicating the start of a special figure change game such as a symbol change start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, and otherwise hold It is determined that the icon change condition is not satisfied. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1211. If it is determined that the hold icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. In addition, the hold icon change condition includes the elapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, a specific determination result in the determination of success / failure in a change before the hold icon, or a predetermined operation by the player. May be. Further, the hold icon change condition may always be satisfied before the target hold change is performed, or vice versa. In addition, it may be uncertain whether the condition is established (undefined). Further, the hold icon change condition once determined may be changed or canceled thereafter.

  In step S1211, hold icon change processing is performed. In the hold icon change process, the hold icon change scenario is read from each storage area of the scenario storage area in the RAM 508, and it is determined whether or not the display mode of each hold icon needs to be changed based on each hold icon change scenario. If a change is necessary, a process for changing the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a process for setting a change animation of the hold icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1213.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure variable games held has decreased. For example, when it is determined that the number of holds has decreased based on the symbol variation start command, the prefetch result information command, or the like from the first sub-control unit 400, the process proceeds to step S1215, and it is determined that the number of holds has not decreased. In this case, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1215, a hold icon display position change process is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds (for example, a movement animation or deletion animation of the hold icon, a movement animation between the hold / change icon, etc. is set). Process). Thereafter, the hold icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the change icon display control process. First, in step S1301 of the variation icon display control process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the special figure variation game is started. For example, if it is the timing at which the symbol variation start command is received from the first sub-control unit 400, it is determined that the special symbol variation game has been started. Otherwise, at the timing at which the special symbol variation game is started. Judge that there is no. If it is determined that it is the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is determined that it is not the timing when the special figure variable game is started, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1303, a variable icon lottery process is performed. In the variation icon lottery process, for example, with reference to a variation icon display mode lottery table (FIG. 90) to be described later, a display group immediately before the start of variation (immediately before suspension digestion) of the suspended icon corresponding to the started special figure variation game. (If the display mode immediately before the start of the change of the hold icon is white, blue, or red, it is “ball system”, and if it is a box or a thousand box, it is “box system”). Based on the timer and the random number value for variation icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon for the started special figure variation game is determined by lottery. The display mode of the variation icon in this example includes “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest”. Note that the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be determined in the hold icon display control process (step S1203) together with the display mode of the hold icon. In that case, the variation icon lottery process in step S1303 can be omitted. In that case, the information on the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be included in the hold icon change scenario.

  In step S1305 subsequent to step S1303, a process for displaying the change icon of the determined display mode in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a process for setting a movement animation or a change animation between the hold / change icons). Including). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1307.

  In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. For example, if the timing is from receiving the symbol variation start command from the first sub-control unit 400 to receiving the symbol variation stop command from the first sub-control unit 400, the special symbol variation game is being executed. If not, it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1309. If it is determined that the special figure variable game is not being executed, the variable icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display interruption condition, for example, an effect that is executed on almost the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 such as a super reach effect is started, or that a power interruption has occurred (for example, the first sub-control unit) The occurrence of power interruption was detected based on the command from 400). If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1311. If it is determined that the variable icon display interruption condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1313. Further, the effect of interrupting the display of the variation icon may be an effect that overlaps at least part or all of the target variation icon.

  In step S1311, change icon display interruption processing is performed. In the change icon display interruption process, a process for interrupting (or stopping or stopping) the display of the change icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1313. Here, when the display of the fluctuation icon corresponding to a certain special figure variable game is interrupted, the display of the fluctuation icon may be resumed during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game or may not be resumed. is there. The variation icon display interruption process includes a process of interrupting the display of a part of the variation icon being displayed. When the display of a part of the variation icon is interrupted, the variation icon may not be easily identified. Further, display may be performed such that the display area of the variable icon is enlarged or reduced as time passes. That is, the display interruption of the variation icon includes a state where the variation icon is not displayed or at least a part of the variation icon is not displayed.

  In step S1313, it is determined whether or not the display of the variation icon is interrupted. If it is determined that the display of the variation icon is suspended, the process proceeds to step S1315. If the display of the variation icon is not suspended (for example, the variation icon is being displayed), the process proceeds to step S1319. .

  In step S1315, it is determined whether the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied. As the variable icon display restart condition, for example, that the super reach effect has been completed, the power is restored from the power interruption state (for example, the power recovery is detected based on a command from the first sub-control unit 400), Etc. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1317. If it is determined that the variable icon display restart condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1317, a variable icon display restart process is performed. In the variation icon display restart process, a process for resuming the display of the variation icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. In the variation icon display restart process, the display of the variation icon may not be resumed if a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In step S1319, it is determined whether the variable icon change condition is satisfied. Examples of the variable icon change condition include winning a predetermined random number lottery performed by the second sub-control unit 500. If it is determined that the change icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1321, and if it is determined that the change icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1323.

  In step S1321, change icon change processing is performed. In the variation icon change processing, processing for changing the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting variation animation of the variation icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1323. Further, when the variation icon display interruption condition is satisfied at the same time, control is performed to change the display mode of the variation icon in a state where a part or all of the variation icon is not displayed, and the display interruption condition for the variation icon is performed. Is not established and the display is resumed, a variation icon having a display mode different from the display mode prior to the interruption may be displayed.

  In step S1323, it is determined whether or not the variable icon display end condition is satisfied. As the variation icon display end condition, for example, that the special figure variation game has been terminated (for example, that the symbol variation stop command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400), a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation, and the like. is there. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1325. If it is determined that the variable icon display end condition is not satisfied, the variable icon display control process is ended and the process returns to the effect control process. .

  In step S1325, change icon display end processing is performed. In the variation icon display end processing, processing for erasing the variation icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including processing for setting a variation icon erasure animation) is performed.

  The variation icon may be displayed during all special figure variation games, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific performance mode is set or according to the game state). It may be displayed only during the special figure variable game (switching the possibility).

  86 to 89 show examples of the hold icon display mode lottery table used in the hold icon change scenario lottery process (step S1203) of the hold icon display control process. FIG. 86 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased fourth hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 3 (when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4). ing. FIG. 87 shows an example of the hold icon display mode lottery table used for the increased third hold when the number of holds at the time of winning is 2 (when the number of holds is increased from 2 to 3). ing. FIG. 88 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the second hold increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 1 (when the number of holds increased from 1 to 2). ing. FIG. 89 shows an example of a hold icon display mode lottery table used for the first hold that is increased when the number of holds at the time of winning is 0 (when the number of holds is increased from 0 to 1). ing.

  In the hold icon display mode lottery table shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the hold icon change scenario for the hold is determined based on the timer group to which the increased variable timer of hold belongs and the random number value for the hold icon display mode lottery. Is done. The timer group to which the increased hold variation timer belongs is determined based on a prefetch result information command or the like from the first sub-control unit 400, and the hold icon display mode lottery random value is obtained from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. Is done. The range that the random number value for holding icon display mode lottery in this example can take is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical value range is 100).

  For example, when the number of holds increases from 3 to 4, and the increased hold variation timer is timers 1 to 5 (timer group 1, immediately off-line), as shown in FIG. In the random number range 0 to 79), a pending icon change scenario of “at the time of winning: white, after 1 change: white, after 2 change: white, after 3 change: white” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of the display, and thereafter, white is maintained until the hold is digested and the hold icon is deleted. In the display mode column of the hold icon display mode lottery table, “-” indicates that the display mode set before that is maintained. Further, in the same display mode column, the display mode immediately before digestion of the suspension is shown in gray.

  Further, for example, when the number of holdings increases from 2 to 3, and the increased holding variation timer is timers 8 to 10 (timer group 3, expected low: hit), as shown in FIG. With the probability (random number range 56 to 60), a pending icon change scenario of “when winning: white, after 1 change: blue, after 2 change: red” is set. That is, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold is white at the beginning of display, changes to blue after 1 change, and changes to red after 2 changes (just before the hold is digested).

  The display mode of the hold icon in this example is “red”, “blue”, “white” from the higher reliability (big hit reliability) in the spherical hold icon display group. In the display group, they are “thousand boxes” and “boxes” in order of reliability. 86 to 89, in the hold icon display mode lottery table, the timer groups 3, 5, and 7 selected at the time of winning are more reliable than the timer groups 1, 2, 4, and 6 selected at the time of losing. It is easy to select a high display mode, and it is easy to change to a display mode with high reliability.

  FIG. 90 shows an example of a variation icon display mode lottery table used in the variation icon lottery process (step S1303) of the variation icon display control process. In the variation icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 90, the final display mode (holding icon display group) of the pending icon corresponding to the special map variable game to be started, the variation timer of the special map variable game, and the variation Based on the random number value for icon display mode lottery, the display mode of the variation icon is determined. The random number value for the variation icon display mode lottery is acquired from a random number counter provided in the RAM 508. The range that can be taken by the random icon for variation icon display mode lottery in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is white (the hold icon display group is a ball system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 9, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “white” is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 0 to 34), “blue” is selected with a probability of 40% (random number range 35 to 74), and a probability of 20% ( “Red” is selected in the random number range 75 to 94), and “gold” is selected with a probability of 5% (random number range 95 to 99). In this example, even if the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red other than white, the display mode (white, blue, red, gold) of the variable icon is selected with the same probability as when the display mode is white. However, when the final display mode of the hold icon is blue or red, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be different from the probability. For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon is red, the selection probability of white or blue is lower than the above (including 0%), and the selection probability of red or gold is higher than the above (including 100%). )

  Further, for example, when the final display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be started is a box (the hold icon display group is a box system), and the variable timer of the special figure variable game is the timer 14, As the display mode of the fluctuation icon, “smoke” (for example, a mode in which smoke comes out of the box to indicate that it is an empty box) is selected with a probability of 2% (random range 0 to 1). , “Sake” (for example, a mode in which liquor comes out of the box) is selected with a probability of 33% (random number range 2-34), and “sword” (with a probability of 30% (random number range 35-64)) For example, a mode in which a sword comes out from a box is selected, and a “family crest” (for example, a mode in which a family crest comes out from a box) is selected with a probability of 35% (random number range 65 to 99). . Similarly to the case where the hold icon display group is a spherical system, the selection probability of the display mode of the variable icon may be varied depending on whether the final display form of the hold icon is a box or a thousand boxes.

  The display mode of the variation icon corresponding to the hold icon of the spherical system is “gold”, “red”, “blue”, and “white” from the higher reliability. The display mode of the fluctuation icon corresponding to the box-type hold icon is “family crest”, “sword”, “sake”, and “smoke” in order of high reliability. It should be noted that the display modes “sword” and “sake” of the fluctuation icon are confronted with the swordsman character and the sword if the specific contents (for example, “sword”) are executed during the fluctuation (for example, “sword”). This suggests a swordsman reach directing, “if you drink”, a drink comparison reach directing by confronting you with a samurai character. The big hit reliability of each display mode shown in FIG. 90 is the reliability in the special FIG. The reliability of each display mode of the variation icon may be different for each gaming state, or may be the same for all gaming states. In addition, the reliability of each display mode may be different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or may be the same between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

  Here, when referring to reliability, general reliability indicates the ratio of occurrence of a target event among multiple occurrences, but reliability in this industry is a big hit. It is an abbreviation for reliability and indicates what percentage of the abbreviation is a big hit when an effect of the same mode is executed. For example, the display mode “red” of the variation icon having a reliability of 30.3% notifies the player that the probability that the success / failure result of the variation is a big hit is 30.3%, The player is informed that the probability that the result will be out of date is 69.7%. In other words, it can be said that the pre-reading notice is notifying the jackpot reliability at the same time and notifying the reliability at the same time. In addition, the reliability is not limited to a value of 1, and may have a width, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution of the random number range in the table shown in FIG. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  As described above, there are five display modes of the hold icon in this example: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “box”, and “thousand boxes”. There are eight display modes of the fluctuation icon: “white”, “blue”, “red”, “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, “family crest”. Among these, three types of “white”, “blue”, and “red” are common display modes for the hold icon and the change icon. Two types of “box” and “thousand box” are display modes specific to the hold icon, and five types of “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”, and “family crest” are specific to the change icon It is a display mode. In other words, the hold icon display mode of this example has three types of common display modes and two types of unique display modes, and the display mode of variable icons includes three types of common display modes and five types of unique display modes. There are display modes. In this example, the number of unique display modes of the variable icon (5 in this example) is larger than the number of unique display modes of the hold icon (2 in this example). The display mode of the hold icon may be a common display mode (unique display mode is 0).

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 1-1)
91 and 92 show examples of effect display in Example 1-1 of this embodiment in time series. Here, in FIG. 91, FIG. 92, and each figure mentioned later, the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in the symbol display areas 208a-208c of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 is represented by the downward white bold arrow. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed. Further, the illustration of the fourth symbol may be omitted.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variation icon display area 800. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, one fluctuation icon can be displayed, and whether or not the fluctuation is appropriate can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the fluctuation notice) according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. The fluctuation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 900 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon. In addition, a frame-like image (indicated by a rectangle in the drawing) indicating the position of the variation icon display region 800 may be displayed on the outer periphery of the variation icon display region 800. The frame-like image may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 800), or may be displayed constantly. .

  A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 900, the number of hold of the special figure variable game can be notified by the number of the hold icons, and whether the hold is appropriate or not is notified with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon (pre-reading notice) ) Is possible. The hold icon display area 900 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas hold the second to fourth hold. Each corresponding hold icon can be displayed. In this example, numbers 1 to 4 are respectively displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. Clarification of the position of the fourth region may be omitted. Further, in the hold icon display area 900 of this example, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  FIG. 91A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the fluctuation of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 display device 214 shows the special special figure 2 variable game stop symbol. FIG. D is displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first LED from the left to indicate that there is only one special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold of special figure 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. As a result, the success or failure of the special figure 1 variable game is notified with a relatively low reliability (for example, 0.2% (see FIG. 90)). A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. The display mode of the hold icon 901 is “white”.

  FIG. 91 (b) shows a state where the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 is increased by one. As shown in FIG. 91B, a new hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900. The display mode of the hold icon 902 is “box”. Further, the display mode of the hold icon 902 is changed to “thousand boxes” in the next special figure variable game based on the hold icon change scenario.

  91 (c) and 91 (d) show a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. As shown in FIGS. 91 (c) and 91 (d), the special figure E display device 212 is stopped and the special figure E (displacement) is stopped, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbols other than symbol combinations for notifying the winning. The symbol combination “decoration 1—decoration 3—decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is started. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 in this example, an effect moving image representing light, for example, is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and eventually disappear. ing. In this example, the erase animation ends at the same time as the change icon 801 disappears. However, after the change icon 801 disappears, for example, an effect representing light is continuously displayed, and the erase animation ends when the effect disappears. May be. That is, the timing at which the change icon disappears does not necessarily coincide with the timing at which the erase animation ends. Further, the display time may be varied depending on the display mode of the variation icon.

  The start timing of the fluctuation icon erasing animation is, for example, the same as the timing at which the special figure variable game ends, but may be before or after the special figure variable game ends. Good. Further, the end timing of the change icon erasing animation is, for example, the same time as the start of the next special figure variable game, but may be before the next special figure variable game is started. Or later.

  91 (e) to 91 (g) show a state after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIGS. 91E to 91G, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation (in this example, a movement animation between the hold and change icons, a hold icon movement animation, and a hold icon change animation) is executed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. Here, in this example, it is assumed that the hold icon 901 changes to the change icon 802 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game. Since the change icon 802 immediately after the change is displayed at the same position in the same manner as the hold icon 901 immediately before the change, the change from the hold icon 901 to the change icon 802 may not be visually recognized. In this example, the display mode (final display mode) of the variation icon 802 is “white”, which is the same as the display mode of the hold icon 901, and only the display size is different. Execution is omitted. However, even if the display mode of the fluctuation icon 802 and the display mode of the hold icon 901 are the same, a change animation between the hold / change icon may be executed. The hold icon and the variation icon may have the same form and the same size. In such a case, it may be defined that the moving animation of the variable icon is performed without performing the animation of deleting the held icon.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area.

  In the change animation of the hold icon, first, for example, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping the hold icon 902 in a layer (front) above the hold icon 902 (FIG. 91 (f)). The hold icon 902 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the display size of the effect moving image is gradually reduced, a hold icon 902 whose display mode is changed from “box” to “thousand boxes” appears. In this example, since the change animation and the movement animation of the hold icon 902 are executed at the same time, the hold icon 902 is visually recognized so that the display mode changes while moving.

  FIG. 91 (h) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. As shown in FIG. 91 (h), the special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212, and symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the symbol are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. “Decoration 3—Decoration 3—Decoration 1” is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the variation icon 802 is executed in the same manner as the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to 91 (d).

  92 (a) to 92 (d) show a state after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIGS. 92A to 92D, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. Here, in the variation icon lottery process (step S1303 in FIG. 85), it is assumed that the display mode of the variation icon 803 corresponding to the started special figure 1 variation game is determined as “family crest”.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation (in this example, a movement animation between the hold / change icon and a change animation between the hold / change icon) is executed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In this example, the variation icon 803 during movement overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in the symbol display area 208a (FIG. 92 (a)). In this example, since the variation icon 803 is displayed in a layer above the decorative design, a part of the decorative design is shielded by the variation icon 803. Thereby, it can be emphasized that the number of holds has changed. Note that the variation icon 803 may overlap the entire decorative design, or may be displayed in a layer below the decorative design. On the contrary, part or all of the variation icon and the decorative design or other images in the middle of movement may overlap. As a result, the fluctuation icon cannot be visually recognized at least for a predetermined period, so that the player's attention may be gathered more.

  In this example, the change animation between the hold and change icons is executed after the movement animation between the hold and change icons ends (after the change icon 803 moves to the change icon display area 800). In the change animation between the hold and change icons, in the change icon display area 800, the thousand box that is the original display mode of the change icon 803 (the final display mode as the hold icon 902) vibrates rattlingly (FIG. 92 (b)). )), A family crest appears in the thousand boxes (FIG. 92C), and finally only the family crest is displayed as the variation icon 803 (FIG. 92D). That is, it can be said that the moving animation is not completed until the change animation is completed.

  In this example, the change animation between the hold / change icons is executed in a mode different from the change animation of the hold icon (for example, a mode not executed in the change animation of the hold icon). Further, the change icon 803 after the end of the change animation is displayed in a mode (“family crest” mode) that is not displayed as a hold icon.

  In this example, since the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 moves to the change icon display area 800 and changes to the change icon in a series of flows, the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon is digested. In some cases, the player can clearly recognize that the figure variation game has been performed.

(Example 1-2)
93 and 94 show examples of effect display in Example 1-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 93 (a) shows a non-fluctuating state after a predetermined time has elapsed with the number of holds in FIG. 1 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure d (displacement) is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214. Yes. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turn off all the LEDs to indicate that the holdings of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both zero. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 9-decoration 4-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed.

  Since the erasing animation in the fluctuation icon display area 800 has already ended, no fluctuation icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800. However, since a frame-like image (rectangle in the figure) is displayed in this example, the position of the variable icon display area 800 is clearly shown. Further, since the number of holds is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900.

  FIG. 93 (b) shows a state immediately after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the non-variable state shown in FIG. 93 (a). As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of special figure 1 based on winning the special figure 1 starting port 230. Since the special figure 1 variable game is started immediately after winning a prize, the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 remains zero. Here, it is assumed that the determination result of whether or not the variation is appropriate is out of date, and the variation timer is timer 11 (super reach A (out)).

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the started special figure variation game is suddenly displayed without any movement animation or variation animation between the hold / variation icons. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “sword”. No hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900.

  93 (c) to 93 (g) show states during the variation period of the special figure variation game. First, in FIG. 93 (c), a reach state is reached, and “decoration 4” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b. Thereafter, the display of the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 gradually turns white (FIG. 93 (d)), and is switched to the screen background for the super reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) (FIG. 93 (e)). ). When the screen background of the super reach effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon ( In this example, the change icon 801) is deleted.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 93 (f)). The fluctuation of shaking means a state in which the temporarily stopped decorative pattern repeats shaking up and down, right and left, enlargement / reduction, and the like, and indicates that it is not a stop display. In the super-reach effect screen background (effect display area 208d), a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 93 (g)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions (for example, the center of the screen). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon (the change icon 801 in this example) in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed at the original positions. The variation icon 801 is displayed suddenly without any movement animation or change animation between the hold / variation icons. The manner in which the variation icon 801 is displayed again is the same as the manner in which the variation icon 801 is displayed when the special figure variable game is started (FIG. 93 (b)). In some cases, it is possible to draw the player's attention by making an illusion as if to be played. Moreover, there are cases where it is possible to suppress stoppage by making it difficult to specify the number of holds.

  93 (h) to 94 (b) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. As shown in FIGS. 93 (h) to 94 (b), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 4-” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation of decoration 5-decoration 4 "is finished and stopped. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is started. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 (display mode: sword) of the present example, similarly to the erase animation of the variation icon 801 (display mode: white) shown in FIGS. For example, an effect moving image representing light is displayed, and the effect moving image and the fluctuation icon 801 itself gradually become smaller and finally disappear. As described above, the deletion animation of the same mode may be performed even for the fluctuation icons having different reliability levels. On the contrary, different types of deletion animation may be performed for each display mode of the variable icon. Similarly, the animation modes of the above-described animations (increase, move, change, delete, etc.) may be different for each display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 starting game 230 is won in the state of the holding number 0 shown in FIG. 94 (b) and the special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 94 (c), a change icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the started special figure change game is displayed in the change icon display area 800, and movement animation and change animation between the hold / change icons. It is displayed suddenly without accompanying.

(Example 1-3)
95 and 96 show examples of effect display in Example 1-3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 95 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the fluctuation shown in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the leftmost LED to indicate that there is only one special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays the special figure 2. Is displayed as 0 on hold.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: thousand carton box) is displayed.

  FIG. 95 (b) shows a state immediately before the end of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), in this example, before the special figure 1 variable game is ended, an animation for deleting the variable icon 801 in the variable icon display area 800 is started. In this way, the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the fluctuation ends.

  FIG. 95 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 95 (c), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “2-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the erasure animation of the variation icon 801 is completed almost simultaneously with the end of the special figure 1 variation game.

  FIG. 95 (d) to FIG. 96 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 95 (d), in the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. Here, it is assumed that the determination result of whether or not the variation is appropriate is out of date, and the variation timer is timer 11 (super reach A (out)). In the variation icon lottery process (step S1303 in FIG. 85), the display mode of the variation icon 802 corresponding to the variation is determined to be “family crest”.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation (movement animation and change animation between the hold and change icons) is started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 95 (d) to (e)).

  In the change animation between the hold and change icons, in the change icon display area 800, the thousand boxes that are the original display form of the change icon 802 vibrate (FIG. 95 (e)), and a family crest appears from the thousand boxes ( FIG. 95 (f)), and finally only the family crest is displayed as the variation icon 802 (FIG. 95 (g)).

  In the state shown in FIG. 95 (f), “decoration 3” is displayed in both the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b. Thereafter, the display on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 gradually turns white (FIG. 95 (g)), and is switched to the screen background for the super reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) (FIG. 95 (h)). ). When the screen background of the super reach effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon ( In this example, the variation icon 802) is deleted.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 96 (a)). In the super-reach effect screen background (effect display area 208d), a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 96 (b)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 is resumed. In this example, the variation icon 802 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 has already been erased when returning to the normal screen background. In this example, since it is already suggested that the variation is out of place in the super reach production, the variation icon 802 (display mode: family crest) that notifies the variation with high reliability is displayed again. Then, there is a risk of annoying the player. Therefore, when the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background, the change icon corresponding to the change is erased (the change icon is not displayed when returning to the normal screen background), so that the player In some cases, it can be deterring. In the present embodiment, the above-described variable icon interruption condition applies to the transition to the screen background for super reach production.

  FIG. 96 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 96 (c), the special figure E (offset) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The fluctuation of the movement ends and is stopped.

(Example 1-4)
97 and 98 show examples of effect display in Example 1-4 of the present embodiment in time series. 97 (a) and 97 (b) show a state during a fluctuation period of a special figure 1 variable game during non-electric support. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first LED from the left to indicate that there is only one special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold of special figure 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: box) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900.

  At the time shown in FIG. 97 (b), it is assumed that the priority side special figure 2 has been increased by one. As shown in FIG. 97 (b), the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the hold in the special figure 2 has increased from 0 to 1 by turning on the first LED from the left. In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 2 is not displayed in the hold icon display area 900 during non-electric support. Therefore, the display of the hold icon display area 900 does not change from the state shown in FIG. 97A even if the hold in FIG. 2 increases. In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is not displayed, but may be displayed in the hold icon display area 900 or other areas.

  97 (c) and 97 (d) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, for example, the animation for deleting the variation icon 801 is started simultaneously with the stop display of the symbol. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801 in this example, an effect moving image representing light, for example, is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and eventually disappear. ing.

  FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started. At this point, it is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the hold in the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2 by turning on the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 802 in a predetermined display mode corresponding to the started special figure 2 variation game is suddenly displayed without a moving animation or a variation animation between the hold / variation icons. Regarding the variation icon corresponding to the special figure 2 variation game, unlike Example 1-2, the animation is not executed even if one or more holds exist. The area where the fluctuation icon is displayed is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 902 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game is displayed. Since the special figure 2 variable game is started by interruption, the movement animation and the change animation of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 are not executed at this time and are delayed. In this way, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 may not change when the special figure 2 variable game is started, even if the display mode is determined to change at the start of the fluctuation. .

  97 (f) to 97 (h) show a state where the special figure 2 variable game is finished. The special figure d (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and the symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is started. This erasure animation is executed in a manner different from the erasure animation of the variation icon corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game. In the erase animation of the variation icon 802 corresponding to the special figure 2 variation game, the transparency (transparency) of the variation icon 802 is gradually increased (FIGS. 97 (f) and (g)), and finally it is erased. (FIG. 97 (h)). Here, the variation icon 802 may be deleted after the transparency reaches 100%, or may be deleted before the transparency reaches 100%. The mode of the animation of erasing the variable icon is not only different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different based on the lottery result or the prefetch result.

  98 (a) to 98 (c) show a state after the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, predetermined animations (movement animation and change animation between hold and change icons, movement animation and change animation of the hold icon) are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In this example, the change animation is executed simultaneously with the movement animation between the hold / change icons. In the change animation between the hold and change icons, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping the change icon 803 in a layer above the change icon 803. The fluctuation icon 803 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the display size of the effect moving image is gradually reduced, a variation icon 803 whose display mode is changed from “box” to “thousand boxes” appears. In this example, since the movement animation and the change animation between the hold / change icons are executed at the same time, the change icon 803 is visually recognized so that the display mode changes while moving.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area.

  In the change animation of the hold icon, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon 902 in a layer above the hold icon 902. The hold icon 902 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the display size of the effect moving image is gradually reduced, a hold icon 902 whose display mode is changed from “white” to “blue” appears. In this example, since the change animation and the movement animation of the hold icon 902 are executed at the same time, the hold icon 902 is visually recognized so that the display mode changes while moving.

(Example 1-5)
99 and 100 show examples of effect display in Example 1-5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which a certain special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the leftmost LED to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs to turn off the special figure 2 hold. 0 is displayed.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, the symbol “x” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Since the erasing animation in the fluctuation icon display area 800 has already ended, no fluctuation icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800. A hold icon 901 (display mode: blue) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900.

  FIG. 99 (b) to FIG. 100 (c) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED. Here, it is assumed that the success / failure determination result of the change is a big hit (Special Figure A).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, immediately after the start of fluctuation, a darkening effect is performed in which almost the entire screen is temporarily displayed in black (FIG. 99 (b)). During the darkening effect, decorative symbols, change icons, hold icons, etc. are not displayed, or are displayed internally (controllable) (although controllable status is displayed, priority is higher than the display) Is covered by a black image). The hold icon 901 becomes the change icon 801 simultaneously with the start of change, but the change icon 801 is deleted along with the execution of the darkening effect (the first deletion of the change icon 801). In the 4th symbol display area 208e, the 4th symbol variation display is performed even during the darkening effect, and it is notified that the variation is occurring.

  Thereafter, when the darkening effect is finished, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, etc. can be visually recognized (FIG. 99 (c)). In this example, since the movement animation and the change animation between the hold / change icons are internally ended during the darkening effect, the display mode has changed from “blue” to “red” in the change icon display area 800. A fluctuation icon 801 is displayed.

  Thereafter, “decoration 3” is displayed in both the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b (FIG. 99 (d)).

  Thereafter, the display of the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 gradually turns white (FIG. 99 (e)), and is switched to the screen background for the super reach effect (in this example, the swordsman reach effect) (FIG. 99 (f)). ). When the screen background of the super reach effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon (the hold icon (the hold icon display area 900) displayed in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed. In this example, the change icon 801) is deleted (the second deletion of the change icon 801). In the 4th symbol display area 208e, during the switching to the screen background for the super reach effect and during the super reach effect, the 4th symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify that it is changing.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 99 (g)). In the super-reach effect screen background (effect display area 208d), a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for super reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 99 (h)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the display of the variation icon and the hold icon in the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 is resumed. In this example, the change icon 801 whose display mode has changed from “red” to “gold” is displayed during the super reach production (while the change icon is being deleted). When returning to the normal screen background, the fluctuation icon 801 for notifying the validity of the fluctuation with high reliability is displayed again, thereby informing the player that the fluctuation has not ended yet and the chance remains. it can.

  Thereafter, the screen background is switched from the normal screen background to the reverse screen effect (FIG. 100A). When the screen background for the reverse effect is switched, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced again and moved to the upper right corner of the screen, and the fluctuation icon and the hold icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 are displayed. (The change icon 801 in this example) is deleted (the third deletion of the change icon 801).

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” informing the 15R special jackpot is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed (see FIG. 100 (b)). On the screen background for the reverse effect, the word “win” is displayed, and a moving image indicating that the confrontation is won (reverse victory) is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for the reverse effect is returned to the normal screen background (FIG. 100 (c)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 return to the original positions. The variation icon 801 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is changed to a special display mode “NO” for notifying the success / failure of the variation with a reliability of 100%. In this example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 changes every time the display is restored after being erased (blue → red → gold → win). The reliability of the display mode after the change is higher than the reliability of the display mode before the change, or is the same as the reliability of the display mode before the change. Further, it is not always necessary to change the display mode at the time of erasing. For example, the first change may be executed during erasure, and the second change may be executed during display.

  FIG. 100 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure A (15R special big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the fluctuation of the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” ends in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, the symbol “◯” for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. Further, in the variation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 is started (fourth deletion of the variation icon 801).

  In this example, the change icon 801 is deleted three times during the change period and four times if the change end is included. As described above, the variation icon with high reliability may be erased more times in one variation. However, even if the variation icon with high reliability has a large number of deletions, the length of the period during which the variation icon is displayed may be longer than the variation icon with a small number of deletions.

(Example 1-6)
101 and 102 show examples of effect display in Example 1-6 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which a certain special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold in FIG. 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 (display mode: blue) is displayed in the second area. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, no fluctuation icon is displayed. In this example, a frame-like image that clearly indicates the position of the variable icon display area 800 is also not displayed.

  101 (b) to 101 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, a predetermined animation is started. Here, in this example, the display time of the variation icon differs depending on the final display mode as the hold icon, and becomes longer as the reliability of the display mode is higher. For example, when the final display mode of the hold icon is default (for example, white), the display time of the variable icon corresponding to the hold icon may be set to zero. When the display time of the fluctuation icon is set to 0, the movement animation and the change animation between the hold and change icons are omitted, and the change animation of the hold icon is deleted without changing the hold icon to the change icon (deletion of the hold icon) (Animation) may be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the hold icon display area 900, an erase animation of the hold icon 901 and a moving animation of the hold icon 902 are started. In the deletion animation of the hold icon 901, an effect moving image representing, for example, light is displayed around the hold icon 901 (FIG. 101 (b)), and the effect moving image and the hold icon 901 itself are gradually reduced (FIG. 101 (c). )) And finally disappear (FIG. 101 (d)).

  In the movement animation of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area. Here, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the moving animation of the hold icon 902 may overlap with the deletion animation of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 101 (e) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has ended. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  101 (f) to (h) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure fluctuation game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. In this example, since the display mode is the default for the hold icon 901, the movement animation between the hold / variation icons is omitted. However, since the display mode of the hold icon 902 is not the default, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is omitted. Is executed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 801 and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  Thereafter, “decoration 3” is displayed in both the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b (FIG. 101 (h)).

  102 (a) to 102 (d) show a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. The display time of the fluctuation icon 801 (for example, the time from the start of the moving animation between the hold and change icons to the end of the change icon deletion animation) is at least the display time of the change icon corresponding to the default hold icon (in this example, It is longer than 0).

(Example 1-7)
103 and 104 show an example of effect display in Example 1-7 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which a certain special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 turns on the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold in FIG. 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. Since the erasing animation in the fluctuation icon display area 800 has already ended, no fluctuation icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 800. The hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) is displayed in the second area, and the third area is displayed. Shows a hold icon 903 (display mode: blue).

  103 (b) and 103 (c) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  In the special figure 1 variable game, the effect of the pre-reading mode is started on the basis that the predetermined condition is established. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal screen background is switched to the screen background for the prefetch mode. When switched to the screen background for the prefetch mode, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen. In addition, the variable icon display area 800 is reduced and moved to the lower right corner of the screen, and the hold icon display area 900 is reduced and deformed to be vertically long and moved above the variable icon display area 800. The first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 are arranged in order from the bottom close to the variable icon display area 800. In the normal screen, the moving direction of each icon in the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 is basically the left-right direction (left direction). On the pre-reading mode screen, the moving direction of each icon is the up-down direction. (Downward). That is, when the screen is switched from the normal screen to the screen for the prefetch mode, the positions and sizes of the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 and the moving directions of the icons are changed. In the effect display area 208d, a moving image of the hero character is displayed, and characters “high probability state entry!” And “high probability state” indicating that the pre-reading mode has been entered are displayed.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 in the lower right corner of the screen, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 801, and the change icon display area below is gradually enlarged while the display size is gradually enlarged. Move to 800. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 moves from the second area to the first area, and the hold icon 903 moves from the third area to the second area.

  FIG. 103 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, by pre-displaying a specific symbol combination, it may be pre-read informed that there is a highly reliable hold. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon 801 is deleted.

  FIG. 103 (e) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In this special figure 1 variable game, the effect of the prefetch mode is continued. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area.

  FIG. 103 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed, and the variation icon 802 is deleted.

  FIG. 103 (g) to FIG. 104 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED.

  In the effect display area 208d, the look-ahead mode effect is continued, and a moving image in which the main character finds the swordsman character is displayed, suggesting the execution of the swordsman reach effect (FIG. 103 (g)). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 903 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  Thereafter, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are in the reach state, and the effect display area 208d is switched to the screen background for the swordsman reach effect (FIG. 103 (h)). In this example, even after switching to the screen background for the swordsman reach production, the display of the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 at the lower right of the screen is maintained. For this reason, the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon (only the fluctuation icon 803 in this example) in the hold icon display area 900 are not erased.

  Thereafter, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the upper right corner of the screen, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. (FIG. 104 (a)). On the screen background, a character “losing” is displayed and a moving image indicating that the confrontation has been lost is displayed.

  Thereafter, the screen background for the swordsman reach production returns to the normal screen background (FIG. 104 (b)). When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is continued. In addition, the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 return to the original positions.

  104 (c) and 104 (d) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the fluctuation of the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. (FIG. 104 (c)). In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon deletion animation is started, and the fluctuation icon 803 is deleted (FIG. 104 (d)).

(Example 1-8)
105 and 106 show examples of effect display in Example 1-8 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 105 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first and second LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs. It is displayed that the hold in the special figure 2 is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 (display mode: thousand carton box) is displayed in the second area.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. At the time of power interruption, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are all turned off.

  FIG. 105 (c) shows a state immediately after power recovery. When a power interruption occurs during the fluctuation period, the main control unit 300 saves information on the fluctuation lottery results (whether determination result, stop symbol, fluctuation display time (timer number), etc.). For this reason, after the power recovery, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 over the remaining fluctuation time. In this example, it is assumed that a winning to the special figure 1 starting port 230 occurs after the power recovery, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is increased from 2 to 3. On the other hand, since the information such as the lottery result of the variation is lost in the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variation of the decorative symbol, such as “Recovering”, “Please wait for a while”, etc. A power recovery screen including a text message is displayed for a predetermined time. On the power recovery screen, decorative symbols, change icons, hold icons, etc. are not displayed. After receiving the symbol variation stop command or the next symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 resumes control such as decoration symbol variation stop display.

  FIG. 105 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. The first sub-control unit 400 performs control to display default symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c based on the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. As a result, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the default symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. When power interruption / recovery occurs during the fluctuation period, various animations of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon are not executed during the fluctuation period.

  105 (e) and 105 (f) show a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, predetermined animations (movement animation between hold and change icons, change animation between hold and change icons, hold icon movement animation) are started. Here, in the 1st sub control part 400, the information on the display mode of a hold icon has disappeared by power interruption. In this example, when the information on the display mode of the hold icon disappears, the first sub-control unit 400 displays all the hold icons (including the hold icons 903 corresponding to the hold increased during the recovery) in common display. It is displayed in a mode (in this example, the display mode is “Hatena (?)” Which is not normally displayed, but it may be the default display mode “White”).

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the change animation between the hold and change icons, the display mode of the change icon 802 changes from “Hatena” which is the display mode as the hold icon to “white”, for example. The final display mode of the variation icon is determined based on, for example, the determination result of the variation included in the symbol variation start command. Therefore, unlike the hold icon, the fluctuation icon can be displayed as usual even after power interruption. The change animation between the hold and change icons is executed at the same time as the movement animation between the hold and change icons.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 moves from the second area to the first area, and the hold icon 903 moves from the third area to the second area.

  FIG. 105 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed.

  FIG. 105 (h) to FIG. 106 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, predetermined animations (movement animation between hold and change icons, change animation between hold and change icons, hold icon movement animation) are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the change animation between the hold and change icons, the display mode of the change icon 803 changes from “Hatena” which is the display mode as the hold icon 902 to, for example, “red”. The final display mode of the variation icon is determined based on, for example, the determination result of the variation included in the symbol variation start command. Here, at the time of FIG. 105 (a), the display mode of the hold icon 902 is “thousand boxes”. However, since the hold icon change scenario or the like has been lost due to power interruption, the display mode of the change icon 803 is not a box system. Don't be. For example, when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is determined based on the display mode of the hold icon, and the scenario is lost due to power interruption / recovery, the display mode of the fluctuation icon is set to the scenario with no scenario or the least reliable scenario. To be determined. The change animation between the hold and change icons is executed at the same time as the movement animation between the hold and change icons.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 903 moves from the second area to the first area.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 106 (b), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. At this time, even if the hold icon 903 at the time of return (display mode: Hatena) still remains, the hold icon 904 (display mode: box) corresponding to the hold increased after the return from power interruption is normally read-ahead notification ( (Display in a predetermined display mode) may be performed.

(Example 1-9)
FIG. 107 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-9 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 107 (a) shows a state during a variable period (immediately before the end) of a special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 0, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 2—decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is performed. This state is a state waiting for a symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the fluctuation of the shaking is finished and the symbol combination is stopped and displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. Here, the variation icon display end condition in this example is not the reception of the symbol variation stop command, but a predetermined time (for example, the variation time of the variation timer of the variation) has elapsed since the start of the variation. .

  FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended, but the first sub-control unit 400 has missed the symbol fluctuation stop command. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure E (disconnection) is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination fluctuation fluctuation is still being executed due to the missing symbol variation stop command.

  In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon erasing animation is started and the variation icon 801 is erased when the variation time of the variation timer has elapsed, regardless of the missing of the symbol variation stop command.

  In this example, the fluctuation of the symbol combination continues, but it may be possible for the player to notice that the special figure variation game has already ended by deleting the variation icon 801. In addition, while the fluctuation icon 801 is erased in the fluctuation icon display area 800, it is possible to cause a sense of incongruity that the fluctuation fluctuation continues in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In some cases, it can be triggered. Thereby, since it is possible to notify the game store clerk that some abnormality has occurred, the game store clerk may be able to grasp the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When a symbol variation stop command is received, a variation icon deletion animation may be performed.

(Example 1-10)
FIG. 108 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-10 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 108 (a) shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in this example, the change icon and the hold icon are displayed only in a specific production mode (in this example, the 爺 mode), and at present, the production mode other than the specific production mode (in this example, Yoshimune mode) Suppose that Therefore, at present, the variation icon and the hold icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 6" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 108 (c) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Here, when this special figure 1 variable game is started, the production mode is switched from the Yoshimune mode to the Samurai mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established. Conditions for switching to the 爺 mode include, for example, that a specific lottery result has been derived (may be look-ahead), that the stage stage has been changed based on the player's operation, and that the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number , Winning a predetermined stage change lottery, etc. In the heel mode, the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 appear, and the change icon and the hold icon can be displayed. In this example, the variation icon 801 (display mode: blue) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is suddenly displayed in the variation icon display area 800 without any movement animation or variation animation between the hold / variation icons. . In addition, in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: thousands of boxes) are suddenly displayed without animation.

  FIG. 108 (d) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, an animation for deleting the fluctuation icon 801 is performed.

  108 (e) to 108 (g) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure fluctuation game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are performed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is established, holds a predetermined storage information as a hold storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 disturbance). A hold display means (for example, a decorative pattern) capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold when a predetermined hold display condition is satisfied when a numerical value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) is established. When the display device 208, the hold icon display area 900, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500) and a predetermined hit / no-go judgment condition are satisfied, the go / no-go judgment means (for example, at least a judgment of right / no-go determination) (for example, , Special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)), and if the predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied, A symbol display means (for example, a special symbol display device 212, a special symbol 2 display device 214, and a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing symbol variation stop display that displays a symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of success or failure; When a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900, a first sub-control unit 400, a first notice) capable of executing at least a predetermined notice. 2 sub-control unit 500), wherein the notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied. The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started (for example, at the same time or after the start of the symbol variation), The aspect of the variable icon is from an aspect related to the aspect of the hold icon (for example, an aspect in which at least a part of the shape, the size, the color, the written character, and the operation mode (animation) is common). It is characterized by becoming.

  According to this structure, a player's interest can be improved effectively by execution of a highly continuous notice.

  In addition, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player's motivation can be improved by illusioning the player as if it is held more than it actually is. May be possible).

  Moreover, according to this structure, it may be able to alert | report clearly that the said fluctuation | variation is performed based on having suspended | suspended.

  Moreover, according to this structure, it may become easy to understand what kind of notice is given for the change.

  In addition, according to this configuration, the mode of the hold icon as the hold prefetching notice is composed of a form related to the change icon displayed based on the result of the determination of whether or not the change is made, and the continuity of the prefetch notice and the change notice is maintained. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be made to pay attention to the fluctuation rather than the hold icon.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a holding icon storage unit (for example, ROM 406) capable of storing one or a plurality of holding icons having different modes (for example, texture data corresponding to the holding icons of a plurality of display modes) and And variation icon storage means (for example, ROM 406) capable of storing one or a plurality of variation icons having different aspects (for example, texture data corresponding to the variation icons of a plurality of display aspects), and the first notice condition ( For example, when the change start) is satisfied, the notification condition is satisfied, and when a second notification condition (for example, increase in the number of holdings) different from the first notification condition is satisfied, The advance notice condition is satisfied, and the advance notice means, when the first advance notice condition is established, the change icon recording as the advance notice. A predetermined mode is determined from the variation icons stored in the means, and at least the variation icon can be displayed in the mode (for example, steps S1303 and S1305 of the variation icon display control process). When the second notice condition is satisfied, a predetermined mode is determined from the hold icons stored in the hold icon storage unit as the notice, and at least the hold icon is displayed in the form. This is possible (for example, steps S1203, S1205, and S1207 of the hold icon display control process), and the variation icon storage means varies the common variation icons (for example, variations of display modes “white”, “blue”, “red”). Icon) at least, and the holding icon storage means has a common holding icon in the same mode as the common variation icon. Down (e.g., display mode "white", "blue", held icon of "red") and characterized in that at least stores.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to further increase the relevance of the notice by displaying the icons in the same manner.

  Further, according to this configuration, the change icon and the hold icon have the same mode, and when the change is performed by digesting the hold, the player is illusioned as if the change was made without reducing the hold. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variation icon storage means has a unique variation icon (for example, display modes “gold”, “smoke”, “sake”, “sword”) that is different from the common variation icon. , A variation icon of “family crest”).

  According to this configuration, the variation icon may have a specific aspect while having a common aspect with the hold icon, so that it may be possible to emphasize to the player that the predetermined hold has been consumed. In some cases, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, for example, when the unique mode of the variation icon has a higher reliability than the common mode, the player's notice is displayed before the start of the target hold variation. There is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from being greatly discouraged even if the target hold is removed because the gambling feeling is not struck.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold icon storage means has a unique hold icon (for example, a hold icon with a display form of “box” or “thousand box”) having a different form from the common change icon and the unique change icon. ) At least, and the fluctuation icon storage means stores a larger number (for example, 5) of the unique fluctuation icons than the number (for example, 2) of the unique hold icons stored in the hold icon storage means. It is a thing to do.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the player's gambling feeling can be kept moderate without excessively expecting the target fluctuation. Moreover, since the effects can be performed in various modes while exhibiting such effects, it may be possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

  Further, according to this configuration, for example, when the specific mode of the hold icon is 0, the player's expectation for the change of the icon may be able to be concentrated on the change.

  In addition, in the game stand according to the present embodiment, the appearance rate of the unique mode of the variable icon may be higher than that of the unique mode of the hold icon. In other words, when the first notice condition is satisfied, the notice means can display at least the inherent variation icon with the first probability as the notice, and the notice means has the second notice If the notice condition is satisfied, the unique hold icon can be displayed at least with a second probability as the notice, and the first probability is higher than the second probability. Features. The second probability may be zero (0%).

  According to this configuration, there is a case where the player's gambling feeling can be kept moderate without excessively expecting the target fluctuation.

  Further, according to this configuration, since the aspect of the icon is more likely to change when it is changing than when it is on hold, it may be possible to attract the player's attention to the change rather than hold.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means that can store at least predetermined start information as a hold (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random value storage area, When the special figure 2 random value storage area) and a predetermined hold display condition are satisfied, the hold display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, which can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold) When the hold icon display area 900, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500) and a predetermined success / failure determination condition are satisfied, the determination / non-permission determination means (for example, FIG. 2) When the related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) and a predetermined symbol variation condition are satisfied, after the symbol variation is performed, the result of the determination of the success / failure is performed. Symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least a symbol variation stop display that stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol, and a predetermined notice condition Is established, a notice means capable of starting at least a predetermined notice (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900, a first sub-control section 400, a second sub-control section) 500), wherein the notice means can display at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied, and the notice means Is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started (for example, at the same time as or after the beginning of the symbol variation). If the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied after the change icon is displayed, the change icon display can be stopped at least (for example, steps S1307 and S1309 of the change icon display control process), When the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied, and when the second notice stop condition different from the first notice stop condition is satisfied, The predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied, and the mode of the variation icon is a mode related to the mode of the hold icon (for example, shape, size, color, written character, mode during operation (animation)) At least a part of which is a common aspect).

  According to this configuration, by erasing the variation icon at various occasions, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variation and improve the interest of the game stand.

  Moreover, according to this structure, a player may be able to make a player pay attention to the display of the fluctuation icon in fluctuation. Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be surely notified that the hold has been digested without interfering with other notices executed during the fluctuation.

  In addition, according to this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the increase / decrease in the number of holdings by providing a plurality of timings for canceling the display of the variable icon indicating that the holdings have been consumed, and the operation of the game machine by suppressing stoppages, etc. May be able to promote.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first notice stop condition is established during a predetermined symbol variation display period, and the second notice stop condition is the predetermined symbol change display. The period is established after the first notice cancellation condition is established.

  According to this configuration, by erasing the variation icon a plurality of times within one variation period, it is possible to make the player have an illusion as if the variation has been performed by digesting a plurality of suspensions by digesting one suspension. There is a case.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the second notice stop condition is a specific symbol variation display in which the symbol display means stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to a specific determination result (for example, big hit). In the case of execution, it is established with a first probability (for example, a probability that a super reach effect is executed in the case of a big hit), and the second notice stop condition is determined by the symbol display means by the specific display means. When executing the symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol mode corresponding to the determination result (for example, outlier) different from the determination result, the second probability (for example, the outlier) different from the first probability is executed. The probability that the super reach effect is executed in this case) is established, and the first probability is higher than the second probability.

  According to this configuration, the greater the variation in the jackpot reliability, the more easily the announcement effect is executed, and there is a case where the announcement effect with a high jackpot reliability with a low appearance frequency is performed for the executed announcement effect. By repeating the stop and return of the display of the variation icon, the above effects are achieved but the other effects described above are not disturbed.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the notice means has the change icon in the first form (for example, the display form of the change icon immediately before erasure). Is stopped (for example, interrupted), and the notice means, when the second notice stop condition is satisfied, is different from the first aspect (for example, immediately before erasure). The display of the fluctuation icon is stopped (for example, interrupted) in the display mode of the fluctuation icon.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to easily grasp the reliability of the fluctuation by making it easy to grasp the number of times erasure is performed. In addition, according to this configuration, it may be possible to easily determine whether the display of the fluctuation icon is merely an interruption or an erasure for grasping that the hold has been consumed.

  Further, according to this configuration, by deleting the change icon multiple times in a different manner during the change of 1 performed based on the digestion of 1 hold, the multiple hold is digested and the change is performed multiple times. In some cases, it is possible to make the player have an illusion.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the notice unit displays the change icon when a predetermined notice restart condition is satisfied after the change icon display is stopped (for example, interrupted). It is at least restartable (for example, steps S1315 and S1317 of the change icon display control process).

  According to this configuration, there is a case where it is difficult to grasp the increase / decrease of the hold and the operation of the game machine can be promoted by returning the display of the fluctuation icon once deleted.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold icon and the change icon may have at least a part of the display mode in common and other parts may be different. For example, the hold icon and the variation icon may have at least a part of the shape, size, color, written character, and operation mode (animation) in common, and other parts may be different. Moreover, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon for giving a notice to the same start information may be related to each other (when the change icon is seen, it is grasped which hold icon is associated with. be able to). Further, when switching from the hold icon to the change icon, an animation may be executed.

  According to these configurations, it is easy to understand that the change that is the subject of the hold icon notice is being made, and even after the start of change, the notice is continued in a manner related to the notice that was made before the start of change. May be easy to draw attention to the player. On the other hand, displaying at least some of the modes in a unique mode may allow the player to recognize that the hold has already been digested and the change has been made. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the correct number of pending balances, and the game may be able to proceed smoothly.

  In addition, by displaying the variation icon in a manner related to the hold icon, the player can be illusioned as if it is held more than it actually is, and the game motivation may be improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variation icon with high reliability may be erased in a single variation, or the time ratio may be increased. Variations in which a highly reliable announcement is made tend to have a long variation time and are likely to overlap with other announcements (for example, super reach production), increasing the chance of interrupting / erasing the display. Further, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed while the display of the fluctuation icon is interrupted / erased. In addition, even if the fluctuation icon with high reliability is erased more frequently than the fluctuation icon with low reliability, the display time in the unit fluctuation of the fluctuation icon with high reliability is the display time of the fluctuation icon with low reliability. You may make it become longer than the display time in a unit fluctuation.

  According to these configurations, the number of times the variation icon is erased in one variation serves as a guideline for reliability, and even a player with low skill level may easily grasp the reliability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variation icon may be deleted after the stop display of one symbol. The change being executed and the stop display of the symbol as a result of the change reliably inform the player that the change icon to be erased was based on the fact that the corresponding hold was consumed. There are cases where it is possible.

  Further, the variation icon may be deleted based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, the variation time of the selected variation timer) from the start of the variation. As a result, even when an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 300 or when the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 misses a command, the variable icon can be deleted, and the hold is exhausted. There is a case where it can be notified that this has been done.

  Further, the change icon may be deleted from the start of change until reach is established. As a result, the variable icon may be deleted at a timing that does not interfere with the advance notice.

  Further, the change icon may be erased after the reach is established and before the display of the change icon display area and the hold icon display area is interrupted. As a result, the variable icon may be deleted at a timing that does not interfere with the advance notice.

  Further, the variation icon may be erased before the display of the variation icon display area is resumed. Further, the change icon may be deleted before the symbol stop display is performed. Further, the variation icon may be erased during the symbol fixed display time (the time from the variation stop to the next variation start, for example, about 600 ms).

  Further, the variation icon may be erased based on reception of a predetermined signal from the main control unit 300. Further, the variation icon may be deleted based on the reception of the variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area may be displayed even when there is no change.

  Further, the movement animation from the hold icon to the change icon may be omitted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the display becomes the same as when the display is restored after the display of the change icon is interrupted in the middle of the change, so the number of holds may be misidentified and the player may be prevented from stopping. is there.

  When the display of each icon display area (the icon itself associated therewith) is interrupted in accordance with the execution of super reach, control may be performed so that at least the display of the variable icon is not restored when the display area is restored. In the case where the advance notice is made with the change icon, the player may be uncomfortable if the change icon is shown after the lottery result is lost. Therefore, by doing as described above, it may be possible to avoid leaving a bad impression on the player.

  Further, there may be a plurality of variation icon erasure animation modes. The aspect of the animation of erasing the variable icon may be different for each jackpot reliability or special figure. On the contrary, the same type of erasing animation may be performed with variations in reliability or a plurality of special drawings.

  Further, when the priority of the special figure 2 on the priority fluctuation side is higher than that of the special figure 1, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation icon based on the hold of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted may select the default display mode. Good. Thereby, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from scolding the player's gambling feeling by hitting an advantageous hit too much.

  In addition, it is not necessary to always display the fluctuation icon. For example, the fluctuation icon may be displayed only when the fluctuation icon is displayed as a notice by the effect lottery or when the pre-reading notice (holding icon) for the fluctuation is displayed. Good.

  Moreover, you may change the display mode (For example, a shape, a magnitude | size, an icon moving direction, etc.) of a fluctuation | variation icon display area and a pending | holding icon display area. Thereby, it may be possible not to disturb other notices and effects.

  Further, not only the power interruption / recovery as in the embodiment 1-8, but also when the game state is changed due to, for example, a big hit or ST end, the hold icon and the variation icon are determined in advance a predetermined number of times. You may make it display in the given mode.

  Further, the erasure and return of the variation icon may be repeated a plurality of times each time a pseudo-ream is performed.

  Further, when a special success / failure determination result is derived as the determination result, execution of at least one of the moving animation, the change animation, and the erasure animation on the change icon may be restricted. Thereby, it may be possible not to interfere with the notice or the production.

  In addition, the reliability may not decrease when the hold icon changes to the hold icon, and the reliability may decrease when the change icon changes from the hold icon or from the change icon to the change icon.

  In addition, the variation icon may have an aspect (for example, “gold”) having a jackpot reliability of 100%.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a game table according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 2nd Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 2-1)
109 and 110 show examples of effect display in Example 2-1 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, the four characters “Yatsushiro Shogun” as shown in FIG. In the variation icon and each hold icon, for example, the standby animation (clockwise rotation) in the form shown in FIG. 81A is executed. The period, phase, and the like of the standby animation are not necessarily the same between the plurality of hold icons or between the change icon and the hold icon. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (a), the variation icon 801 has the character “army” in the normal position, and the hold icon 901 has the character “yo” in the normal position instead of “army”.

  109 (b) to (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped. That is, the change icon 801 is displayed as a single picture (display mode that does not rotate, deform, scale, etc.) of a predetermined texture image (for example, a texture image in an initial state) during execution of the erase animation. However, the standby animation of the variation icon may also be executed during the execution period of the variation icon deletion animation.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 (b) to 109 (f), in the erase animation of the variation icon 801, the variation icon 801 moves downward in the variation icon display area 800 and gradually starts from the portion that protrudes outside the variation icon display area 800. Will be erased. In this example, the erase animation of the change icon 801 ends before the next special figure change game is started. Further, in this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 901 is continued even while the deletion animation of the change icon 801 is being executed.

  FIG. 109 (g) to FIG. 110 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure fluctuation game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is started. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 109 (g) to (d)). In this example, when the movement animation between the hold / change icon is started, the standby animation of the change icon (hold icon) is stopped. That is, the change icon 802 is displayed as a single picture of a predetermined texture image (for example, an initial texture image) during the movement animation. The standby animation may be canceled at the same time as the start of the moving animation, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the moving animation, or after the moving animation starts, the fluctuation icon 802 is rotated in the clockwise direction. It may be the time when it has rotated to the initial state for the first time. In addition, during the execution of the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the standby animation of the change icons may be executed together. Further, the movement animation and the standby animation may be controlled independently, or the other control state may be switched according to one control state.

  Assume that two suspensions in FIG. 1 have been continuously increased at the time shown in FIG. 109 (h). The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 2. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) are the respective areas of the hold icon display area 900 (the hold icon 902 is the first area, the hold). The icon 903 rises from below to the second area (FIG. 109 (h)), and then moves around each area in order to conspicuously increase the holding (FIGS. 110 (a) and (b). ). In this example, during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the standby animation of the hold icon is not executed. That is, the hold icons 902 and 903 are displayed as a single picture of a predetermined texture image (for example, a texture image in an initial state) until the increase animation ends. In addition, during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the standby animation of the hold icon may be executed together.

  In this example, if the movement animation execution period and the increase animation execution period overlap, the change icon during the movement animation and the hold icon during the increase animation may be displayed overlapping each other. is there. Specifically, a change icon 802 in the process of moving from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800 by the movement animation, and a hold icon in the process of increasing in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 by the increase animation. 902 are displayed overlapping each other (FIG. 109 (h), FIG. 110 (a)). The change icon 802 has a higher display priority than the hold icon 902, and the change icon 802 is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 902, so that part or all of the hold icon 902 is shielded by the change icon 802.

  On the other hand, there are a change icon 802 in the process of moving from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800 by the movement animation, and a hold icon 903 in the process of increasing in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 by the increase animation. The execution periods of both animations overlap, but the display does not overlap.

  At the time shown in FIG. 110 (c), the increase animation of the hold icon ends. When the increase animation of the hold icon ends, the hold icons 902 and 903 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the hold icon display area 900, respectively. In addition, a standby animation of the hold icons 902 and 903 is started.

  The movement animation between the hold / change icons is continued after the increase animation of the hold icon is finished (finished in FIG. 110 (d)). In this example, the movement animation between the hold / change icons starts before the start of the increase animation of the hold icon and ends after the end of the increase animation of the hold icon. That is, in this example, the execution time (scale) of the movement animation between the hold / change icons is longer than the execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon.

(Example 2-2)
111 and 112 show examples of effect display in Example 2-2 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed.

  FIG. 111 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  111 (c) to (e) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon deletion animation, the transparency of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually increases (FIGS. 111 (c) and (d)) and eventually disappears. (FIG. 111 (e)).

  FIG. 111 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 5—decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, so that even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and the state becomes non-variable.

  FIG. 111 (g) shows a state immediately after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the non-variable state and starting the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 based on winning the special figure 1 starting port 230. Since the special figure 1 variable game starts immediately after winning the prize, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 continues to indicate that the special figure 1 hold is 0 (the leftmost LED is lit immediately after winning the prize). May be) When the special figure 1 starting game 230 is won in the non-variable state and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the increase animation of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 may be omitted (shortened display).

  FIG. 111 (h) shows a state in which the number of suspensions in the special figure 1 is increased by one after the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon is started. In this increase animation of the hold icon, a hold increase target area of the hold icon display area 900 (an area where a new hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is displayed. The first area when the hold increases from 0 to 1) In FIG. 5, a hold icon 902 with high transparency (for example, 100%) is displayed, and the hold icon 902 becomes visible by gradually decreasing the transparency of the hold icon 902. The increase animation of the hold icon in this example is a mode opposite to the erasure animation (animation in which the transparency gradually increases) shown in FIGS. 111 (c) to 111 (e). In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is also executed during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon. In particular, if the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is the same, the increase animation and the deletion animation may be displayed by reversing the reproduction order of the same animation.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the number of suspensions in FIG. The special figure 1 hold lamp indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 4. In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of three hold icons is started. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icons 903 to 905 having high transparency (for example, 100%) are displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and the transparency of the hold icons 903 to 905 is gradually lowered. The hold icons 903 to 905 appear. In this example, the execution periods of the increase animations for each of the hold icons 903 to 905 overlap. In this example, since the increase animation of the hold icon 902 has not yet ended when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 to 905 is started, the increase period of the hold icon 902 is the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 903 to 905. It overlaps with the duration of the animation. As described above, the execution periods of a plurality of increase animations (in this example, each increase animation of the hold icons 902 to 905) may overlap each other.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  112 (c) and 112 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon deletion animation and a hold icon movement animation are executed.

  In the hold icon erasure animation, the transparency of the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually increases, similar to the hold icon 901 deletion animation shown in FIGS. 111 (c) to 111 (e). (Fig. 112 (c)) and finally disappear (Fig. 112 (d)).

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 903 to 905 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively (FIGS. 112 (c) and (d). )). In this example, the execution period of the hold icon movement animation overlaps with the execution period of the hold icon deletion animation. Further, the standby icon standby animation is also executed during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation and the erase animation.

  In this example, the hold icon during execution of the erase animation and the hold icon during execution of the movement animation may be displayed overlapping each other. Specifically, the hold icon 902 that is being erased from the first area of the hold icon display area 900 by the delete animation and the second area of the hold icon display area 900 are moved from the second area to the first area by the moving animation. The hold icon 903 on the way is displayed overlapping each other. Since the hold icon 902 that is the target of the deletion animation has a higher display priority than the hold icon 903 that is the target of the movement animation, the hold icon 902 is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 903. Thereby, part or all of the hold icon 903 may be blocked by the hold icon 902. However, depending on the transparency of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 903 may be visible even in an overlapping portion with the hold icon 902.

  Here, the standby animations of a plurality of hold icons (for example, four hold icons 902 to 905 shown in FIG. 112 (b) and three hold icons 903 to 905 shown in FIG. 112 (d)) are synchronized with each other. May be. Further, the standby animation of the hold icon that is executing another animation (for example, increase, movement, or deletion) may be synchronized with the standby animation of the other hold icon. The period of the standby animation of the hold icon may be maintained from a predetermined trigger (for example, power-on, previous jackpot, etc.). In this case, the cycle calculation control may be continuously performed even when the hold icon is not displayed.

(Example 2-3)
113 and 114 show examples of effect display in Example 2-3 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 113 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. One hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed.

  FIG. 113 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 113 (c) to FIG. 114 (b) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the transparency of the hold icon 901 gradually increases in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 and eventually disappears. For example, the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 25% at the time shown in FIG. 113 (c), 50% at the time shown in FIG. 113 (d), and at the time shown in FIGS. 113 (e) and (f). 75%, and 100% at the time shown in FIG. 113 (g) (or the hold icon 901 itself may be deleted). In this example, when the deletion animation of the hold icon is started, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped.

  Here, at the time shown in FIG. 113 (f), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon, in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) with high transparency (for example, transparency 100%) is displayed, and the transparency of the hold icon 902 gradually increases. By lowering, the hold icon 902 becomes visible. For example, the transparency of the hold icon 902 is 75% at the time shown in FIG. 113 (f), 50% at the time shown in FIG. 113 (g), and 25% at the time shown in FIG. 113 (h). , 0% at the time shown in FIG. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon is stopped until the increase animation of the hold icon ends.

  In this example, the hold icon 901 to be deleted and the hold icon 902 to be increased have the same display mode “white”, and the delete animation of the hold icon and the increase animation in a mode opposite to the delete animation are provided. Are executed in the same area (the first area of the hold icon display area 900). When the increase animation is started in the middle of the erasing animation, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases to a predetermined transparency and then gradually decreases. Note that the hold icon 901 to be deleted and the hold icon 902 to be increased do not have to be in the same display mode, and the execution period of the deletion animation of the hold icon and the execution period of the increase animation are not the same time. Also good. If the erase animation and the increase animation are started almost simultaneously and the execution periods of both animations are substantially the same, the apparent transparency of the held icon may hardly change during the execution of both animations.

  In this example, the transparency of the hold icon 901 gradually increases from 0% to 75% in FIGS. 113 (c) to 113 (e), and thus the transparency of the apparent hold icon gradually increases. In FIG. 113 (f), the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 75%, but the hold icon 902 having a transparency of 75% is displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, the apparent transparency of the hold icon is lower than 75%. In FIG. 113 (g), the transparency of the hold icon 901 is 100%, but since the hold icon 902 with a transparency of 50% is displayed in an overlapping manner, the apparent transparency of the hold icon is about 50%. In FIGS. 113 (h) to 114 (a), the hold icon 901 is erased, and the transparency of the hold icon 902 gradually decreases. As a result, the apparent transparency of the hold icon gradually increases during the period shown in FIGS. 113 (c) to 113 (e), and reaches 75% transparency at the time shown in FIG. 113 (e). It gradually decreases during the period of FIG. In this example, the standby icon standby animation is stopped in the period of FIGS. 113 (c) to 114 (a), but the standby animation may be executed.

  In this example, the erasing animation indicating that the hold is consumed and the increasing animation for canceling the erasing animation are executed in an overlapping manner. As a result, the hold icon that should have gradually faded and disappeared may gradually become darker from a certain point in time. Therefore, there is a case where an illusion can be given as if the change was made without decreasing the hold.

  In some cases, it is possible to make an illusion that the number of holdings does not increase in spite of a game ball entering the starting port.

(Example 2-4)
115 and 116 show examples of effect display in Example 2-4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 115 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white), a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani), and a hold icon 903 (display mode: blue) are displayed. The waiting animation is running. Here, in this example, there are Sabo Hani display modes such as “White Sabo Hani”, “Blue Sabo Hani”, “Red Sabo Hani” as the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon, and the Sabo Hani display mode is the same as the Spherical system. In addition, the level of reliability is represented by color (white <blue <red), and each display mode of the Sabohan system has higher reliability than the display mode of the same color sphere system.

  The Sabohani-type hold icon 902 and the ball-type hold icons 901 and 903 may have different standby animation periods (for example, the number of texture data). The kick timing of the standby animation may depend on each animation. The period of the standby animation may be synchronized between the hold icon 901 and the hold icon 903 that are the same sphere system but are different in display mode. Further, the period of the standby animation may be synchronized between the change icon 801 and the hold icons 901 and 903 of the same spherical system.

  FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed. Is displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed. In the variation icon erasing animation, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves gradually become smaller and finally disappear. In this example, before the erasing animation of the variation icon 801 is completed, the next special figure 1 variation game game is started.

  115 (c) to 115 (f) show states during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. When the animation for moving between the hold and change icons and the animation for moving the hold icon are started, the animation for deleting the change icon is not finished. And the execution period of the animation to delete the floating icon overlap.

In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 and 903 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first and second areas, respectively. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 115 (c), since the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 has not yet ended, four icons (variation icons 801 and 802, hold icons 902 and 903) are temporarily displayed. . Thereby, since more icons than the actual number of holds can be displayed, it may be difficult for the player to specify the number of holds. Further, the icon displayed in a larger number than the actual number of reservations may be either a fluctuation icon or a reservation icon. In addition, the icons that are displayed in a number larger than the actual number of holds may be configured such that an icon having a different form from both the change icon and the hold icon is displayed. (For example, 801 in FIG. 115 (c)).
At the time shown in FIG. 115 (f), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) appears at the right end of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold increase target area from the right end (if the hold increases from 2 to 3, 3 areas (shown by broken-line rectangles in the figure) are moved by a predetermined movement distance. The moving speed of the hold icon 904 may be a constant speed or may be accelerated / decelerated in the middle. With the hold icon 904 during the increase animation, a predetermined standby animation may be executed. The standby animation at this time may not be synchronized with the standby animation of other icons.

  FIG. 115 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 6-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 3” are displayed. "Is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon deletion animation is executed. In the variation icon erasing animation, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 802, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 802 themselves gradually become smaller and finally disappear. In this example, before the erasure animation of the variation icon 802 is completed, the next special figure 1 variation game game is started. In the hold icon display area 900, the increased hold icon 904 is in the process of moving from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 toward the third area.

  FIG. 115 (h) to FIG. 116 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable game of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually enlarged. Move to display area 800. In this example, the variation icon 803 itself does not move to the variation icon display area 800 but moves around in the effect display area 208d. This moving animation is executed with a predetermined probability only when, for example, the display mode of the variation icon is a specific display mode (for example, a Sabohan display mode). In this movement animation, the variation icon 803 may overlap a part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (FIG. 115 (h), FIG. 116 (a)), or the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. You may move outside (FIG. 116 (b)). As described above, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is not limited to a mode in which the change icons are moved from the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800.

  In the variation icon display area 800, not the variation icon 803 but the characters “Gekiatsu” are displayed. As described above, the variation icon display area 800 does not necessarily display the variation icon to be varied.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area. In the hold icon display area 900, the increased hold icon 904 is in the process of moving from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 toward the third area. At the time shown in FIG. 115 (h), the hold increase target area moves from the third area to the second area based on the fact that the hold has been digested, and the target position in the moving animation of the hold icon 904 also changes from the third area. Move to 2 areas. As a result, the movement distance of the hold icon 904 increases from L1 to L2, and the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon 904 becomes longer. Thus, in this example, the movement distance and execution time in the movement animation of the hold icon may change during the execution of the movement animation. When the suspension of the special map 2 on the priority change side is interrupted as in the embodiment 1-4, the movement distance and execution time of the movement animation of the suspension icon may be shortened.

  Further, in this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 904 that has reached the target position is synchronized with the cycle of the standby animation of another icon (eg, the hold icon 903) at some timing (eg, the timing when the movement animation ends). It may also be set (FIG. 116 (b)).

(Example 2-5)
117 and 118 show examples of effect display in Example 2-5 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 117 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 0, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the hold icon display area 900, no hold icon is currently displayed.

  117 (b) to (d) show the subsequent states in the special figure 1 variable game. It is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 117 (b). The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase icon of the hold icon, the hold icon 901 appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 (the right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208) (FIG. 117 (b)). When it increases from 0 to 1, it moves linearly toward the first region (FIGS. 117 (c) and 117 (d)). At the time shown in FIG. 117 (d), the hold icon 901 reaches the first area, and the increase animation of the hold icon ends.

  The movement distance and execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon vary depending on the position of the hold increase target area. In this example, the first, second, third, and fourth areas are arranged in this order from the left end of the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icon that increases by the increase animation appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900. The moving distance of the increase animation of the hold icon is the longest when the hold increases from 0 to 1, and the shortest when the hold increases from 3 to 4. When the moving speed of the hold icon in the increase animation is constant, the execution time of the increase animation is the longest when the hold increases from 0 to 1, and the shortest when the hold increases from 3 to 4.

  In this example, during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 901, a change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon 901 from “white” to “red” is executed (FIG. 117 (c)). Here, the change animation of the hold icon or the variation icon may be merely changing the icon image of a predetermined display mode to an icon image of another display mode.

  In this example, the standby animation (clockwise rotation) of the hold icon 901 is also executed during the execution period of the increase animation of the hold icon 901. After the increase animation of the hold icon 901 ends, only the standby animation is continued.

  FIG. 117 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 9-decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  117 (f) and (g) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon deletion animation is started. In the hold icon deletion animation, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 moves linearly to the left and goes out of the display area from the left end of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 901 is executed even during the execution period of the deletion animation of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 117 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this time, the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, so that even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and the state becomes non-variable.

  118 (a) to 118 (d) show the state after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the non-variable state and starting the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started (FIG. 118 (a)), and the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed (FIG. 118 (c)). . The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 variable game has been started immediately after winning the prize, so that the special figure 1 hold is continuously displayed as 0 (the leftmost LED is lit immediately after winning the prize. You may).

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started (Fig. 118 (a)), and after a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination "decoration 7-decoration 9-decoration". 5 "is stopped and displayed (FIG. 118 (c)).

  In the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon is started based on winning the special figure 1 opening 230. However, since the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested immediately after winning a prize, the hold icon deletion animation is executed immediately after the start of the increase animation. In this example, the series of animations shown in FIGS. 118A to 118D includes an increase / deletion animation of a hold icon having both an attribute as an increase animation of the hold icon and an attribute as an erase animation of the hold icon. Can be considered. The animation may be an animation in which the increase animation and the erasure animation are continuously performed, or may be stored in advance as a single animation having both attributes.

  In the increase / deletion animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 appears from the right end of the hold icon display area 900 (FIG. 118A) and moves linearly toward the left end of the hold icon display area 900 (FIG. 118B). ), (C)), and goes out of the display area from the left end (FIG. 118 (d)). In this example, the standby animation of the hold icon 902 is executed even during the execution period of the increase / erase animation of the hold icon 902.

  The increase / erase animation of the hold icon is started almost simultaneously with the timing when the special figure 1 variable game is started (FIG. 118 (a)), and ends at a timing later than the end of the special figure 1 variable game (FIG. 118 (d)). That is, the execution time (scale) of the increase / erase animation of the hold icon is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game. In other words, the execution time of the hold icon increase / erase animation is at least longer than the shortest change time of the special figure change game. The shortest variation time may be the shortest variation time in a predetermined gaming state, or may be the shortest variation time in the game machine.

  Also, in this example, the hold icon 902 when the special figure 1 variable game is finished still reaches the first area of the hold icon display area 900 (the hold increase target area when the hold increases from 0 to 1). (FIG. 118 (c)). In the increase / deletion animation of the hold icon, the time from the appearance of the hold icon at the right end of the hold icon display area 900 to the arrival of the first area is an increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases from 0 to 1 (FIG. 117 (b) to (d)) is substantially the same as the execution time. The execution time of the increase animation of the hold icon when the hold increases from 0 to 1 is the longest among the increase animations of various hold icons. Therefore, in this example, the longest execution time in the increase animation of the hold icon is at least longer than the shortest change time of the special figure variable game.

  Further, in this example, the total display time for a certain hold icon (for example, the sum of the execution time of the increase animation, movement animation and deletion animation of the hold icon, or the execution time of the standby animation of the hold icon) is There is a case where it is longer than the variation time of the special figure variation game corresponding to the hold icon. That is, when the animation is executed in a state where there are one or more holds, the animation may be performed across a plurality of variations.

(Example 2-6)
119 and 120 show examples of effect display in Example 2-6 of the present embodiment in time series. In this example, it is assumed that the variation icon display area 800 and the variation icon are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 119 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white sabotani) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani) are displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. At this time, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target area is the third area. In the drawing, the reserved increase target area is indicated by a broken-line rectangle (not actually displayed).

  FIG. 119 (b) shows a subsequent state in the special figure variable game. At this point, it is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. When the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases, a hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon in this example, the hold icon 903 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 increases from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  Here, in each animation (for example, an increase animation, a deletion animation, a movement animation, etc.) accompanied by the movement of the icon (pending icon or variable icon), the moving speed of the icon may differ depending on the display mode of the icon. For example, the moving speed of the savory icon may be slower than the moving speed of the spherical icon.

  FIG. 119 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 7-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  In this example, the hold icon deletion animation is started at the timing when the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the hold icon erasing animation, the hold icon 901 in the first area gradually moves downward and goes out of the display area from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900.

  Moreover, in this example, the movement animation of a holding | maintenance icon is started at the timing which the special figure 1 variable game is complete | finished. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 gradually moves from the second area to the first area. Since the hold icon 903 in the third area is still executing the increase animation, the start of the movement animation for the hold icon 903 is delayed.

  FIG. 119 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation of the hold icon 902 that has moved from the second area has ended. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is ended. Due to the decrease in the hold in FIG. 1 from 3 to 2, the hold increase target area moves from the fourth area to the third area.

  119 (e) and (f) show the subsequent states in the special figure 1 variable game. In the hold icon display area 900, the delayed move icon of the hold icon 903 is started based on the end of the increase animation of the hold icon 903 (FIG. 119 (e)). In the moving animation of the hold icon 903, the hold icon 903 gradually moves from the third area to the second area. At the time shown in FIG. 119 (f), the moving animation of the hold icon 903 ends. Here, the movement animation whose execution start is delayed may be different from the normal movement animation. For example, a moving animation with a delayed start of execution may have a moving speed of the hold icon faster than a normal moving animation. Further, the time required for the moving animation may be shortened by stopping the display of at least a part of the animation. However, the display is performed to the extent that it can be seen that the hold icon is moving.

  FIG. 119 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has been completed and the number of suspensions of special figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 9-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 4” "Is stopped. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3.

  When the special figure 1 variable game is completed, in the hold icon display area 900, an erase animation and a move animation of the hold icon are started. In the hold icon erasing animation, the hold icon 902 in the first area gradually moves downward and goes out of the display area from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 903 gradually moves from the second area to the first area.

  Further, when the holding of the special figure 1 increases, the holding icon display area 900 starts an increase animation of the holding icon. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. The movement animation of the hold icon 904 from the third area to the second area is delayed until the increase animation of the hold icon 904 ends. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 increases from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  FIG. 119 (h) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, the moving animation of the hold icon 903 that has moved from the second area has ended. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is continuously performed. Due to the decrease in the hold in FIG. 1 from 3 to 2, the hold increase target area moves from the fourth area to the third area.

  FIG. 120 (a) shows a state in which the holding of special figure 1 is further increased during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. On the basis of the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, the hold icon increase animation is started in the hold icon display area 900. In the increase animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 905 (display mode: white sabotani) appears from the lower end of the hold icon display area 900 and gradually moves to the third area. In the third area, the increase animation of the hold icon 904 is continuously performed separately from the increase animation of the hold icon 905. That is, in the third region, an increase animation of a plurality of hold icons is executed, and a plurality of hold icons are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, as the retention in FIG. 1 is increased from 2 to 3, the retention increase target area moves from the third area to the fourth area.

  In a portion where a plurality of hold icons are overlapped, even if these hold icons are displayed in the same layer, they are displayed in the foreground as the image data is developed in the VRAM in a later order. Therefore, in the overlapping part of the hold icons 904 and 905, the hold icon 905 that is increased later is displayed in front of the hold icon 904 that is increased earlier. In other words, in this example, the hold icons that are increased later have a higher display priority and are displayed in front.

  The order in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM is not necessarily related to the order in which the image data is displayed (the image having a slower display order has a slower order in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM). In other words, an image in which the image data is expanded in the VRAM may be displayed later and displayed so as to be hidden behind other images.

  120B to 120D show the subsequent state. When the increase animation of the hold icon 904 in the third area is finished (FIG. 120 (b)), the delayed move animation of the hold icon 904 is started (FIG. 120 (c)), and the hold icon 904 is displayed in the third area. The region moves from the region to the second region (FIG. 120 (d)). Also, the movement of the hold icon 905 to the third area is completed at the time shown in FIG. 120 (d), and the increase animation of the hold icon 905 ends.

(Example 2-7)
121 and 122 show examples of effect display in Example 2-7 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 121 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are displayed and synchronized with the fluctuation icon. The predetermined standby animation is executed. At this time, in the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target area in FIG. 1 is the third area, and the hold increase target area in FIG. 2 is the first area. In the drawing, each of the reserved increase target areas of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is indicated by a broken-line rectangle (not actually displayed).

  In this example, the special icon 1 and the special figure 2 share the variable icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, the hold increase target areas in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are the same area when the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0, and are different areas in other cases.

  121 (b) to (d) show a state in which the number of suspensions of special figure 2 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. Based on the fact that the suspension of special figure 2 on the priority fluctuation side has increased from 0 to 1, the retention increase target area of special figure 1 moves from the third area to the fourth area, and the reservation increase target area of special figure 2 is the first Move from the first area to the second area. In this way, the reserved increase target area of FIG. 1 is determined based on the sum of the reserved numbers of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, and the reserved increase target area of FIG. 2 is based only on the reserved number of FIG. It is determined. Further, on the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 and a save animation of the hold icon in FIG. .

  In the increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, in the first area where the hold icon 901 shown in FIG. 1 is displayed, for example, an effect moving image 911a representing a cloud is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 901 (see FIG. 121 (b)), when the display size of the effect moving image 911a is gradually reduced, the hold icon 911 (display mode: white) of FIG. 2 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 911a is displayed. Appears (FIGS. 121 (c) and (d)). In this example, the aspect of the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 is different from the form of the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1 (for example, an aspect that rises from below the hold icon display area 900). Further, the mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 (in this example, “Teihei Tenka” pattern) may be different from the mode of the hold icon in the special figure 1 (in this example, the “Yatsushiro Shogun” pattern). Moreover, the mode of the standby animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be different from the mode of the standby animation of the hold icon in FIG. The increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may have a higher display priority than the save animation of the hold icon shown in FIG.

  In the evacuation animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, the hold icon 901 in the special figure 1 displayed in the first area moves to the second area on the right side, and the hold icon in the special figure 1 displayed in the second area. 902 moves to the third region on the right side (FIGS. 121 (b) to (d)). The movement mode of the hold icon in the evacuation animation is the reverse of the movement animation that moves in the left direction. Note that the save animation is omitted, the hold icon 901 in FIG. 1 is instantaneously moved from the first area to the second area, and the hold icon 902 in FIG. 1 is instantaneously moved from the second area to the third area. It may be moved.

  121 (e) and (f) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 10 ( 0) "is stopped. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 801 in FIG. 1 is executed. In the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 in FIG. 1, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801 (FIG. 121 (e)), and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 itself are gradually reduced (FIG. 121). (F)) and finally disappear. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped. However, the standby animation may be continuously performed during the execution of the erasing animation.

  121 (g) to 122 (d) show the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 2 variable game. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the holding number of the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Due to the decrease of the suspension in FIG. 2 from 1 to 0, the retention increase target area in FIG. 1 moves from the fourth area to the third area in the suspension icon display area 900, and the retention increase target area in FIG. Moves from the second region to the first region. Moreover, in the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons of the special figure 2, the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the change animation between the hold / fluctuation icons of the special figure 2 Is started.

  In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the fluctuation icon 811 and the display size gradually increases. While moving, it moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800 (FIG. 121 (g) to FIG. 122 (a)). In this example, when the movement animation between the hold / change icon is started, the standby animation of the change icon (hold icon) is stopped.

  In the movement animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 1, the hold icons 901 and 902 shown in FIG. 1 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first and second areas, respectively ( 121 (g) to 122 (a)).

  In the change animation between the hold / change icons shown in FIG. 2, a crack is first generated in the circular change icon 811 in the moving animation. After the movement animation ends, the fluctuation icon 811 vibrates rattlingly (FIG. 122 (b)), the fluctuation icon 811 breaks, and a thousand box appears from the inside (FIG. 122 (c)). Is displayed as the fluctuation icon 811 (FIG. 122 (d)). The mode of the change animation between the hold / change icons in FIG. 2 may be a unique mode different from the mode of the change animation between the hold / change icons in FIG.

(Example 2-8)
123 and 124 show examples of effect display in Example 2-8 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 123 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are displayed and synchronized with the fluctuation icon. The predetermined standby animation is executed. Although not shown, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 in the reserved icon display area 900 is the third area, and the reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 is the first area.

  123 (b) to 123 (d) show a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 2 to 3. On the basis of the increase in the number of reserved in FIG. 1 from 2 to 3, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 moves from the third area to the fourth area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 remains the first area. In addition, based on the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, an increase animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is started in the holding icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, a predetermined effect moving image 903a is displayed in the third region (FIG. 123 (b)), and when the display size of the effect moving image 903a is gradually reduced, an effect moving image is displayed. The hold icon 903 (display mode: white) of the special figure 1 newly displayed on the layer below the image 903a appears (FIGS. 123C and 123D).

  123 (e) to 124 (d) show the subsequent state. Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 123 (e), the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. Based on the fact that the number of reserved in FIG. 1 has increased from 3 to 4, the reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 is outside the display area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 2 remains the first area. In addition, based on the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, an increase animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is started in the holding icon display area 900.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 1, the effect moving image 904a similar to the effect moving image 903a is displayed in the fourth area (FIG. 123 (e)), and the display size of the effect moving image 904a is gradually reduced. Then, the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 newly displayed in the layer below the effect moving image 904a appears (FIGS. 123 (f) to (h)).

  Assume that the suspension of special figure 2 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 123 (f). The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. Based on the fact that the holding in FIG. 2 has increased from 0 to 1, the holding increase target area in FIG. 2 moves from the first area to the second area. The reserved increase target area in FIG. 1 remains outside the display area. Further, on the hold icon display area 900, an increase animation of the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 and a save animation of the hold icon shown in FIG.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon in FIG. 2, the effect moving image 911 a having a mode different from the effect moving images 903 a and 904 a is displayed in a layer above the hold icon 901 in the first area (FIG. 123 (f), (G)) When the display size of the effect moving image 911a is gradually reduced, the hold icon 911 (display mode: white) of the special figure 2 newly displayed on the layer below the effect moving image 911a appears. (FIG. 123 (h) to FIG. 124 (b)).

  In the reserved icon evacuation animation of special figure 1 (evacuation animation 1), the hold icons 901 to 903 of special figure 1 displayed in the first to third areas move to the second to fourth areas, respectively (FIG. 123). (F) to FIG. 124 (b)). The execution period of the hold icon evacuation animation (evacuation animation 1) shown in FIG. 1 is substantially the same as the execution period of the hold icon increase animation shown in FIG. Since the increase animation of the hold icon 904 of the special figure 1 is being executed in the fourth area at the time when the hold icon save animation of the special figure 1 is started, the save icon (from the fourth area to the display area) of the hold icon 904 is being executed in the fourth area. The start of execution of (outward movement) is delayed.

  The change animation of the hold icon 901 may be executed during the execution period of the hold icon save animation of FIG. 1 (FIGS. 124A to 124C). In the change animation of the hold icon 901, a predetermined effect moving image 901a is displayed before the hold icon 901 in the display mode “white” (FIG. 124 (a)), and when the effect moving image 901a is gradually reduced, the display is performed. A hold icon 901 whose mode has changed from “white” to “red” appears (FIGS. 124B and 124C).

  Here, in the portion where the images are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect moving image has a higher display priority than the hold icon, so the effect moving image 911a is displayed in front of the hold icon 901 in FIG. 123 (f), (g)). In addition, since the hold icon of the special map 1 on the non-priority change side has a higher display priority than the hold icon of the special figure 2 on the priority change side, the hold icon 901 of the special figure 1 is more than the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2. Is also displayed on the front side (FIG. 123 (h)). Further, since the display priority of the hold icon increased later is higher, the hold icon 904 of FIG. 1 is displayed in front of the hold icon 903 of FIG. 1 (FIGS. 123 (g) to 124 (a)). .

  Since the increase animation of the hold icon 904 of the special figure 1 in the fourth area ends at the time shown in FIG. 123 (h), the delayed evacuation animation (evacuation animation 2) is started. In this evacuation animation, the hold icon 904 in FIG. 1 moves from the fourth area to the outside of the display area (FIGS. 124A to 124C). As described above, the hold icon may be displayed once and then moved out of the display area to be hidden. The hold icon 904 in the evacuation animation may be displayed in an overlapping manner with the evacuation animation hold icon 903 that was previously started (FIG. 124A).

  At the time shown in FIG. 124 (c), the special figure 1 variable game ends. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 9-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 124 (d), the special figure 2 variable game is started. In the special figure 2 display device 214, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 displays that the special figure 2 hold has decreased from 1 to 0. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, the fluctuation icon deletion animation of the special figure 1, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon of the special figure 2, and the movement animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 are started. In accordance with the start timing of the change, the standby animation of each hold icon and the change icon may be synchronized.

  In the variation icon erasing animation of FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 800, for example, an effect moving image 801a having the same form as the effect moving images 903a and 904a is displayed in front of the variation icon 801, and the variation icon 801 is an effect moving image. It is deleted while being hidden by 801a, and then the effect moving image 801a is reduced and deleted.

  In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the hold icon 911 of the special figure 2 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the fluctuation icon 811 and the display size gradually increases. While moving, it moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800.

  In the hold icon movement animation of FIG. 1, the hold icons 901 to 903 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 gradually move to the first to third areas, respectively. In addition, the hold icon 904 outside the display area gradually moves to the fourth area. In this manner, the hold icon that is once hidden may be displayed again.

(Example 2-9)
FIG. 125 shows an example of effect display in Example 2-9 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 125 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 4, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the variation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), the hold icon 903 (display mode: red), the hold icon 904 (display) Aspect: white) is displayed and a predetermined standby animation is executed.

  FIG. 125 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 6" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. In the erase animation of the variation icon 801, a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the variation icon 801, and the effect moving image and the variation icon 801 themselves are gradually reduced and finally disappear. In this example, when the animation for deleting the variation icon is started, the standby animation for the variation icon is stopped.

  125 (c) to (f) show a state after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 125 (c) and (d)).

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 to 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively (FIGS. 125 (c) to (e). )).

  In this example, the change animation of the hold icon may be performed during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation. In the change animation of the hold icon, predetermined effect moving images 903a and 904a are displayed before the hold icons 903 and 904, and when the effect moving images 903a and 904a are gradually reduced, the display mode is changed from “red” to “gold”. A changed hold icon 903 and a hold icon 904 whose display mode has changed from “white” to “red” appear (FIGS. 125C to 125E). By switching the display mode while moving the display position of the hold icon by the moving animation, it may be possible to reliably prevent false recognition of the hold.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 125 (d), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. Due to the increase in the holding in FIG. 1, an increase animation of the holding icon is started in the holding icon display area 900. This increase animation is started during the execution period of the hold icon movement animation and the change animation. In the increase animation of the hold icon, a predetermined effect moving image 905a is displayed (FIG. 125 (d)), and when the display size of the effect moving image 905a is gradually reduced, it is newly displayed behind the effect moving image 905a. The held icon 905 (display mode: white) appears (FIGS. 125 (e) and (f)).

  When the hold icon display area 900 shown in FIG. 125A is compared with the hold icon display area 900 shown in FIG. 125F, the display mode of the hold icons in the first, third, and fourth areas is the same. Only the display mode of the hold icon in the second area (actually, the hold icon 902 in FIG. 125A and the hold icon 903 in FIG. 125F) has changed from “white” to “gold”. Therefore, there is a case where the player can have an illusion that the display mode of the hold icon in the second area has changed from “white” to “gold”, which can improve the interest of the game. . In particular, when the movement animation or change animation of the hold icon is shortened or omitted, the player's illusion as described above may be easily generated.

  Further, when the movement animation or change animation of the hold icon is shortened or omitted, the state of the hold icon display area 900 may change instantaneously from FIG. 125 (a) to FIG. 125 (f). In that case, since the display mode of the hold icon in the third area is “red” having a low appearance frequency in both the state of FIG. 125A and the state of FIG. 125F, the state of FIG. It may be difficult for the player to know that the hold icon 901 in the first area has already been consumed and the hold icon 903 in the third area in FIG. 125 (a) has moved to the second area. For this reason, depending on the player, when the state shown in FIG. 125 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 125 (f), the hold icon in the third area is not moved, and the hold icon in the second area is displayed. There is a possibility that the mode is misunderstood as “white” in the non-read-ahead state is switched to “gold” with high reliability. For this reason, an increase / decrease in the hold icon and a change in the display mode are emphasized and shown by an animation, so that an effective presentation can be performed and a misrecognition of the hold by the player may be prevented.

(Example 2-10)
126 and 127 show examples of effect display in Example 2-10 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 126 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 1, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the variation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white) is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed.

  FIG. 126 (b) shows a state in which the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by one during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 (display mode: red) is displayed for predicting the advance of the increased hold with high reliability. In this example, based on the prefetch notice with the hold icon 902, the prefetch notice is executed even with the hold icons other than the hold icon 902. As a result, the display mode of the hold icon 901 changes from “white” to “village A”. In the hold icon 901, a standby animation is performed in which the left and right are scrambled at a constant cycle. In the effect display area 208d, characters such as “Wai Wai”, “Gaya Gaya”, “What is it”, “What is it?” Are displayed. At this time, the display mode of the change icon 801 may be changed also in the change icon display area 800. These displays indicate to the player that a special pre-reading notice effect has been started.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed and the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by two. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 1-decoration 10 (0) -decoration 4”. "Is stopped. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased to 4. A hold icon 903 (display mode: villager B) is displayed with a predetermined increase animation in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 904 (display mode: villager A) is set in the fourth area. Displayed with increasing animation. In the hold icons 903 and 904, a standby animation is performed in which the left and right are scrambled at a constant cycle. The standby animation of the hold icons 901, 903, and 904 is executed asynchronously.

  126 (d) and 126 (e) show a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 4 to 3.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a change icon deletion animation, a hold icon deletion animation, and a hold icon movement animation are executed. During the execution of the special prefetch notice effect, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is omitted, and the hold icon corresponding to the digested hold may be deleted without changing to the change icon. That is, in the case of a change that starts after a special prefetch notice effect is started, the display of the change icon may be omitted in order to attract attention to the hold icon. In this case, two deletion animations (a deletion icon deletion animation and a hold icon deletion animation) may be executed at the same time.

  In the variation icon erasing animation, the variation icon 801 in the variation icon display area 800 is erased in a predetermined manner. The animation of erasing the changing icon during execution of the special pre-reading notice effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode.

  In the hold icon deletion animation, the display size of the hold icon 901 (display mode: villager A) displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is gradually reduced and finally deleted. The on-hold icon erasing animation during the special pre-reading notice effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 902 to 904 displayed in the second to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900 move to the first to third areas, respectively. The movement animation during the special prefetch notice effect may be executed in a special mode different from the normal mode.

  126 (f) to 127 (c) show the subsequent state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game and the state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 126 (f), a change animation of the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is started. In this change animation, a crack is generated in the hold icon 902 and it vibrates. In the hold icons 903 and 904 in the second and third areas, a standby animation is executed in which the villager notices a change in the hold icon 902. As described above, when the change animation is executed with the hold icon 902 that is the target of the prefetch notice, a special mode (for example, a mode for the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice) is used for the hold icons 903 and 904 other than the target. The waiting animation may be executed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 126 (g), in the change animation of the hold icon 902, the hold icon 902 is broken and a thousand car box appears from the inside. Accordingly, the display mode of the hold icon 902 is changed to “thousand boxes”. In the hold icons 903 and 904, a standby animation is performed in which the villagers are happy when they are all over.

  At the time shown in FIG. 126 (h), the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 10 (0)”. "Is stopped. In the hold icons 903 and 904 in the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation in which the villagers are pleased with their dreams is continued.

  At the time shown in FIG. 127 (a), the special figure 1 variable game corresponding to the target hold of the pre-reading notice is started, and thereafter, the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the special figure 1 hold is three. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons, a movement animation of the hold icon, and an increase animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 903 and 904 move from the second and third areas to the first and second areas, respectively.

  In the increase animation of the hold icon, a new hold icon 905 (display mode: villager B) is displayed in the third area. In this manner, the hold icon 905 that has increased after the start of the change corresponding to the target hold of the prefetch notice may also have a specific display mode different from normal. In the hold icon 905, a standby animation similar to the hold icons 903 and 904 is executed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 127 (b), “decoration 7” is displayed in both of the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and a reach state is reached in which the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b. In the hold icons 903 to 905, a standby animation in a manner of hitting a reach is executed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 127 (c), the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 8-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. In the hold icon display area 900, a stand-by animation is executed in the hold icons 903 to 905, in which the change is disappointing.

  FIG. 127 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 3 to 2.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a change icon deletion animation, a hold / change icon movement animation, and a hold icon movement animation are started.

  In the variation icon erasing animation, the variation icon 802 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is erased in a predetermined manner.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 903 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icons 904 and 905 displayed in the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 gradually move to the first and second areas, respectively.

  The display mode of the hold icons 903 to 905 is changed from the villager mode to the default mode at a predetermined opportunity (for example, a predetermined timing when the fluctuation is stopped or a timing when the fluctuation starts) during execution of these animations or before starting. It returns to a predetermined mode according to the prefetch result. When a new special figure variable game is started, the player can easily focus attention on the hold icon display area 900 in order to confirm the number of holds, so that attention may be easily collected.

  As described above, in this example, when changing the display mode and animation of the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, the display mode and animation of the hold icon that has been increased before and after the hold icon, There is a case where the display mode or animation of the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice is changed. In other words, the display mode and animation of the hold icon may change based on its own prefetch result, and may change based on another hold prefetch result. Thereby, the player's attention may be gathered more in the prefetch notice. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition of a hold subject to a prefetch notice.

(Example 2-11)
128 and 129 show examples of effect display in Example 2-11 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 128 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold is 2, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold is 0.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white sabotani) corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: blue sabotani) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white sabotani) are displayed, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. The standby animations of the fluctuation icon 801 and the hold icons 901 and 902 may be synchronized with each other or may be asynchronous.

  128 (b) to (d) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning combination “decoration 2-ornament 10 (0)-ornament 1 "Is stopped. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is executed. In the erasure animation of the variation icon 801, the variation icon 801 in the savory manner falls down and is gradually reduced to be erased.

  128 (e) to (g) show a state during the fluctuation period of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. It moves (FIGS. 128 (e) and (f)).

  In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 moves to the first area (FIGS. 127 (e) and (f)).

  It is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 128 (g). The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, a new hold icon 903 (display mode: red sabotani) is displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 with a predetermined increase animation.

  128 (h) to 129 (c) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 212, and the symbol combination "decoration 8-decoration 6-decoration 4" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed.

  In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is executed. This erasing animation is executed in a mode different from the normal mode as a special pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading result of the hold corresponding to the hold icon 903. In this erasing animation, the change icon 802 in the savory state falls down (FIG. 128 (h)), and the line of the change icon 802 “I'm not good enough ... I'll ask you ...” is displayed as a balloon. (FIG. 129 (a)), an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed, and the variation icon 802 is erased by the variation icon 802 flying out of the display area (FIGS. 129 (b) and (c)). ). The balloon representing the line of the variation icon 802 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol, overlapping the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In some cases, the erasure animation can attract the player's attention to the hold icon 903 to be pre-readed.

  In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a standby animation of the hold icon 903 is executed. This standby animation is executed in a mode different from the normal mode as a special pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading result of the hold corresponding to the hold icon 903. In this standby animation, the hold icon 903 in a savory state reacts to the line of the change icon 802 (FIG. 129 (a)), and the line of the hold icon 903 “Make it up!” Is displayed as a balloon (FIG. 129 (b)). )). In some cases, the standby animation can attract the player's attention to the hold icon 903 itself that is the target of the prefetching notice. In the first area, the standby animation of the hold icon 902 is executed in a normal manner.

  FIG. 129 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has decreased from 2 to 1.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 803, and the display size is gradually increased to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 903 moves from the second area to the first area.

  As described above, in this example, the animation of the variation icon or the hold icon may be executed in a different manner from the normal based on the own prefetch result or another hold prefetch result. Thereby, a player's attention may be able to be attracted to a prefetch notice. Since the player is paying attention to the change icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 during the period from the change stop to the start of change in which the number of holds changes, the pre-reading notice effect is performed in the areas 800 and 900 during the period. As a result, the player's attention may be collected more effectively.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is established, holds a predetermined storage information as a hold storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 disturbance). A hold display means (for example, a decorative pattern) capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold when a predetermined hold display condition is satisfied when a numerical value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) is established. Display device 208, hold icon display area 900, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500), the hold display means, a predetermined hold movement condition (for example, start of special figure variable game, When the increase of the hold is established, a predetermined hold movement animation (for example, a movement icon movement of the hold icon) for moving the display position of the predetermined hold icon corresponding to the predetermined hold is established. , Increase animation, deletion animation, movement animation between hold and change icons), and when the first hold movement condition is satisfied, the predetermined hold movement condition is satisfied, Even when a second hold movement condition different from the first hold movement condition is satisfied, the predetermined hold movement condition is satisfied, and the hold display means includes the first hold movement condition. Is established, the first hold movement animation for the first hold icon corresponding to the first hold stored in the hold storage means is executed, and the hold display means is the second hold When the movement condition is satisfied, the second hold movement animation for the second hold icon corresponding to the second hold different from the first hold stored in the hold storage means. The hold display means performs the first hold movement being executed when the second hold movement condition is satisfied during execution of the first hold movement animation. The second hold movement animation can be started together with the animation, and the hold display means executes if the first hold movement condition is satisfied during the execution of the second hold movement animation. The first reserved movement animation can be started together with the second reserved movement animation.

  According to this structure, since the number of reservations is notified in various ways, it is possible to improve the interest of the game stand.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the hold display can be made more conspicuous by performing the animation relating to the increase / decrease of the hold number and simultaneously performing notification while clearly informing each hold.

  In addition, according to this configuration, by simultaneously performing a plurality of animations related to the hold, it is possible to improve the frequency with which a plurality of hold icons are displayed simultaneously while clearly informing each hold. It may be difficult to identify the number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where it is not necessary to provide display priority order setting or exclusive control for each animation, and the control can be simplified.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the first hold movement animation and the second hold movement animation are performed simultaneously, at least a part of the display in one hold movement animation is displayed on the other It is characterized by being displayed overlapping with the pending movement animation.

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to easily grasp a plurality of pieces of information regarding the hold only by looking at one point.

  In addition, according to this configuration, while clearly informing the player about the increase / decrease of the hold, there is a case in which an animation that is particularly conspicuous can be arbitrarily conspicuous.

  Further, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reserved animation by shielding a part of one animation from the player so as to be difficult to view.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display means displays the first hold icon in a predetermined display form (for example, display form “white”), and the hold display means includes the second hold display means. Is displayed in the predetermined display mode.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for a player to grasp the number of holds by displaying a plurality of hold icons of the same mode at the same time, and as if it is an excellent platform that makes it easy for a player to accumulate holds. There may be an illusion.

  In addition, according to this configuration, in the case where a pre-reading notice or the like that changes the display mode of the hold icon based on the pre-read result is performed, it may be possible to prevent expected confusion.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first hold movement condition is established when the number of holds stored in the hold storage means decreases, and the first hold movement animation is: It is characterized by comprising an animation showing how the first hold icon is erased from a predetermined display area.

  According to this configuration, by performing animation to show that the suspension is reduced, it is possible to clearly notify that the suspension, which is the player's right, has been digested and the change is being performed, while other animations and execution periods When there are duplicates, the number of holds may be confused as described above.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the second reserved movement animation is started after the start of the first reserved movement animation, the first reserved movement animation is ended. It is characterized in that it can be finished before.

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where it is possible to finally notify the correct number of holds while providing a period for displaying a hold icon equal to or greater than the maximum number of holds.

  Further, according to this configuration, by making the length of one animation shorter than the length of the other animation, it may be possible to shorten as much as possible the period in which the animations are duplicated and the number of holds is mistaken.

  In addition, according to this configuration, one animation is started during the execution of the other animation, and is finished before the other animation is finished. Therefore, there may be a case where the number of holds that have been misidentified during the overlap period can be correctly notified. If the animation that has been performed before the overlap period ends during the overlap period, it is difficult to distinguish when it has ended, and there is a risk that the hold will be misidentified.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means that can store at least predetermined start information as a hold (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 random value storage area, When the special figure 2 random value storage area) and a predetermined hold display condition are satisfied, the hold display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, which can display at least one hold icon corresponding to the one hold) When the hold icon display area 900, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500) and a predetermined display position change condition are satisfied, the first position (for example, the first of the hold icon display area 900) To the second position different from the first position (for example, the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the variation icon). On-hold display position changing means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, on-hold icon display area 900, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, on-hold icon display) that can be changed at least in the display area 800 and outside the display area When the position change process (step S1215) and the change icon display control process step S1305) and a predetermined display mode change condition are satisfied, the hold icon displayed in the first display mode is displayed in the first display mode. A holding display mode changing means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a holding icon display area 900, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, a holding icon, which can be changed to at least a second display mode different from the mode. A game machine comprising a change process (step S1211) and a change icon change process (step S1321)), When the display position change means changes the display position of the hold icon from the first position to the second position, a predetermined hold movement animation (for example, hold icon movement animation, erase animation, increase) Animation, movement animation between hold / variation icons), and the hold display mode changing means changes the display mode of the hold icon from the first display mode to the second display during execution of the hold movement animation. It is made to change into a mode.

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the interest of the game stand can be improved by informing the information regarding the hold in various ways.

  In addition, according to this configuration, the player is notified of the change in the display mode of the hold icon by switching the display mode of the hold icon while attracting the player's attention to the target hold icon by the movement. May be possible and may prevent oversight.

  Further, according to this configuration, while clearly informing that the number of holds has been increased or decreased due to the change of the display position, it is possible to specify the number of holds for a low-skilled player by switching the display mode. Can be difficult. Further, there are cases where a player with low skill level can be confused by simultaneously executing operations having conflicting effects.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display mode changing means is configured to display a predetermined hold display when the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. A feature change animation (for example, a change animation of a hold icon and a change animation between a hold / change icon) is displayed.

  According to this configuration, the animation is performed while the display position is changed while improving the interest by performing the change of the display mode of the hold with the animation, so even if the animation itself is created roughly, It may be difficult to notice. For this reason, there are cases where the interest can be improved effectively with little effort.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, if a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, a determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure (for example, a special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229), FIG. 1). When the related lottery process (step S231)) and a predetermined symbol variation condition are satisfied, at least symbol variation stop display is performed to perform symbol variation and then stop and display the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure When a possible symbol display means (for example, the special symbol display device 212, the special symbol 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208) and a predetermined prefetch notice condition are established, a prefetch notice (for example, a hold icon is displayed). Pre-reading advance notice means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, hold icon display area 900, variable icon display area) that can start at least in a predetermined display mode 800, a first sub-control unit 400, and a second sub-control unit 500), and the prefetch notice unit may cause the hold display mode change unit to change the display mode of the hold icon as the prefetch notice. It is possible.

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to notice a change in the display mode of the hold icon that is performed as a prefetch notice.

  Further, according to this configuration, the trigger for moving the hold icon is likely to be concentrated at the end of the change or at the start of the change. By performing the pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon in accordance with the opportunity, it may be difficult to compete with other notices that are made in accordance with the change, and may not interfere with each other.

  In addition, according to this configuration, since a notice regarding a specific lottery result of a hold is executed together with an animation indicating increase / decrease of the hold, there is a case where it is possible to easily grasp the time until a highly expected change is performed. is there.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the first display position change condition is satisfied, the predetermined display position change condition is satisfied, and the first display position change condition is This is established when the number of suspensions stored in the suspension storage means decreases due to the start of fluctuation.

  According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to change the display mode of the hold icon at the same time while clearly informing that the hold that is the player's right has been digested due to the change. There may be a case where dissatisfaction caused by a notice of decrease in holding that is not a happy one can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, notice means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 800, a hold icon display area 900) capable of at least starting the notice. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500), and the notification means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notification when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied. Yes, the notice means can display at least the hold icon as a look-ahead notice when a predetermined look-ahead notice condition is satisfied, and the notice means, after the symbol variation is started, The variation icon can be displayed, and the display mode of the variation icon is a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The hold display position changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from a third display position (for example, the first area of the hold icon display area 900) based on the establishment of the first display position change condition. When the display position is changed to a fourth display position (for example, the change icon display area 800), the hold display position changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from the third position to the fourth position. The hold movement animation is displayed, and the hold display mode changing means changes the display position of the hold icon from the third position to the fourth position during execution of the hold movement animation. The icon is changed to the variable icon.

  According to this configuration, since it is clearly notified that the hold icon has been switched to the change icon, it may be clearer that the hold has been digested and the change is being performed. In particular, when a pre-reading notice is made at the time when the hold icon is displayed, it is easier to clearly tell the player that the change being executed is the target change of the pre-reading notice. It may be easier to have a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon is a mode selected based on the look-ahead result, and a predetermined area (for example, the number of the hold icon display area 900 in the hold icon display area 900 before and after the execution of the animation indicating the increase / decrease of the hold number). The hold icon displayed in any one of the first to fourth areas may have the same display mode (for example, Example 2-9). In this case, it is a condition that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the hold prefetch, and there are two or more hold icon display modes that change by the hold prefetch. If the number of holds increases during execution of the movement animation of the hold icon, and the number of holds at the time of completion or immediately after the movement animation is the same as the number of holds before execution of the movement animation, misunderstanding is more likely to occur.

  According to this configuration, since the display mode of the hold icon is changed during the execution of the movement animation, it may be possible to prevent misrecognition of the hold that is a target of the pre-reading notice that is easy to occur in the conventional configuration. is there.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the modes of conflicting contents (for example, the increase animation and the deletion animation of the hold icon) are paired with each other (for example, one is a mode in which the transparency of the hold icon is gradually reduced. The other may be configured to gradually increase the transparency, one to gradually increase the display size of the hold icon, and the other to gradually decrease the display size. This not only makes it seem that the number of holds has not been reduced, but also can cause the player to have an illusion that the state of the reduction has been interrupted in the middle. The effect of making up for that discouragement may occur after making you feel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a hold icon erasing animation or the like is also performed at the start of the next change, and therefore, the number of holds at the start of the change of the change may be known. In recent game tables, the smaller the hold, the easier it is to reach, so the smaller the hold, the more frequent the production. Therefore, conventionally, when a reach occurs, it may be unclear whether the reach can be expected. Furthermore, since the relationship between the hold and the change is easy to understand, the relationship between the change being executed and the hold may be easily grasped even if the change time is designed to be significantly short. Furthermore, the player can be illusioned as if a plurality of changes are continuously made by one hold icon, which may improve the operation of the game table.

  In the present embodiment, there is a case where the hold increase animation is continuously performed even after the target fluctuation is completed (for example, Example 2-5). Thereby, it may be possible to make an illusion as if the number of holdings is increased by one starting ball. In particular, when the variation is continuously performed, the effect may be remarkably exhibited.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of increasing animations are simultaneously executed for the same region (for example, Example 2-6). Accordingly, there is a case where the operation can be improved by making an illusion as if a plurality of suspensions are generated by one increase animation. In particular, when the plurality of increased hold icons are in the same mode, there may be a remarkable effect because the hold looks as if it has been split.

  In the present embodiment, the save animation and the increase animation are executed in duplicate (for example, Example 2-7). As a result, it may be easy to understand that the interrupt shown in FIG. 2 has occurred. Conventionally, an advantageous special figure 2 interrupt has occurred, and it was difficult to understand that the fluctuation start due to the disadvantageous special figure 1 hold was delayed. Further, by shielding the disadvantageous hold icon of special figure 1 with the advantageous special figure 2 hold icon, it may be easier to tell the player that special figure 2 is more advantageous.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of movement animations are simultaneously executed in the same manner, and the display manner may change for only one of the hold icons. As a result, there are cases where the change in the display mode of the hold icon can be particularly noticeable as long as the steps are aligned.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 2nd Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 3-1)
FIG. 130 and FIG. 131 show examples of effect display in Example 3-1 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 130 (a) to FIG. 131 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 800. In the variable icon display area 800, a predetermined condition (for example, that the special figure variable game is being executed and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game is the predetermined display mode) is established. In this case, one variation icon can be displayed, and the reliability of the variation can be notified by the display mode of the variation icon.

  A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the holding icon display area 900, the number of holdings of the special figure variable game can be notified by the number of holding icons, and a predetermined reliability can be notified of whether or not the holding is based on the display mode of each holding icon. Is possible. The hold icon display area 900 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively.

  At the time shown in FIG. 130A, the hold icon 901 and the hold icon 902 shown in FIG. 1 are displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, respectively. The display mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is, for example, default white. Each of the holding icons 901 and 902 has a circular “Yatsushiro Shogun” pattern, and each of the holding icons 901 and 902 executes a standby animation that rotates clockwise around the center of the circle. In the standby animation of this example, it is assumed that four frames (for example, textures T001 to T004 in FIG. 81A) are periodically repeated. At the time shown in FIG. 130 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are both in the initial animation state (for example, T001 in FIG. 81 (a)) in which “8” is the normal position. That is, the animation modes (in other words, the angle, the direction, the motion, the phase, the action, the pose, and the like) of the two hold icons 901 and 902 (in this example, all the hold icons being displayed) are aligned. For example, the standby animations of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are synchronized with each other. In this example, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 800.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 130 (b), the hold icons 901 and 902 are each rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is in T002 of FIG. That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 130 (c), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, a new hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The hold icons 901 and 902 previously displayed are each rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 130B, and both of them are animation modes (for example, FIG. 81 (a) ) At T003). That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned. On the other hand, the newly held hold icon 903 is in an initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the previous hold icons 901 and 902. For example, the standby animation of the hold icon 903 is not synchronized with the standby animation of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 130 (d), the hold icons 901 and 902 are each rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. For example, it is in T004 of FIG. That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode that rotates 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. Even at this time, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time point shown in FIG. 131 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are each rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 130 (d), and both are in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. In the animation mode. That is, even at this time, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned. At the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. At this point, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise in a state where the animation modes are aligned (FIG. 131 (b)).

  In this example, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state. The hold icon 903 may be aligned with the predetermined animation mode when triggered by the animation mode.

(Example 3-2)
FIG. 132 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (d) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 132 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 132 (b) thereafter. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower side outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900 (FIGS. 132B and 132C). In this example, the hold icon 903 during the increase animation is maintained in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position without executing the standby animation.

  Assume that the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is completed at the time shown in FIG. 132 (d). At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 previously displayed are in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position. The hold icon 903 for which the increase animation has ended is also in the initial animation mode. That is, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. The start timing of the increase animation may be adjusted so that the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, or the moving speed of the hold icon 903 in the increase animation is adjusted. Alternatively, both the start timing of the increase animation and the moving speed may be adjusted. When the increase animation ends, a standby animation of the hold icon 903 is started, and the three hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned.

(Example 3-3)
FIG. 133 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-3 of the present embodiment in time series. 133 (a) to 133 (d) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 133 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 133 (b) thereafter. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower outside of the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900, as in the embodiment 3-2 (FIG. 133 (b ), (C)). In this example, the hold icon 903 during the increase animation is maintained in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position without executing the standby animation.

  Assume that the increase animation of the hold icon 903 is completed at the time shown in FIG. 133 (d). At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “Y” is the normal position. On the other hand, the hold icon 903 for which the increase animation has ended is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position. That is, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 does not match the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. When the increase animation ends, the hold icon 903 rotates clockwise together with the hold icons 901 and 902 in a state where the animation modes are not aligned. After that, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 at a predetermined timing (for example, the same timing as in the above-described or later embodiments).

(Example 3-4)
FIG. 134 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (d) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 134 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 134 (b) thereafter. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower side outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900 as in the case of the embodiments 3-2 and 3-3 ( 134 (b) and (c)). In this example, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is also executed on the hold icon 903 that is executing an increase animation.

  At the time shown in FIG. 134B, the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 during the increase animation is also in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. That is, at this time, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are already prepared. Thereafter, during the execution of the increase animation and after the end of the increase animation, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIGS. 134C and 134D).

  At the time when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends (FIG. 134 (d)), the hold icons 901 to 903 are all in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. That is, in this example, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the three hold icons 901 to 903 are all in the initial animation mode. When the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the start timing of the increase animation may be adjusted so that all of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are in the initial animation state, or the hold icon in the increase animation The moving speed 903 may be adjusted, or both the start timing of the increasing animation and the moving speed may be adjusted.

(Example 3-5)
FIG. 135 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (d) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 135 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this point in time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 135 (b) thereafter. Due to the increase in the hold in FIG. 1, an increase animation for displaying a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon 903 gradually rises from the lower part outside the display area to the third area of the hold icon display area 900, as in the examples 3-2 to 3-4. 135 (b) and (c)). In this example, the standby animation is also executed for the hold icon 903 during the increase animation.

  At the time shown in FIG. 135 (b), the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 during the increase animation is also in an animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. That is, at this time, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are already prepared. Thereafter, during the execution of the increase animation and after the end of the increase animation, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIGS. 135 (c) and (d)).

  When the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends (FIG. 135 (d)), the hold icons 901 to 903 are all in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. That is, in this example, when the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the three hold icons 901 to 903 are all arranged in an animation mode other than the initial state.

(Example 3-6)
FIG. 136 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-6 of the present embodiment in time series. 136 (a) to 136 (d) show a state during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 136 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 136 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  It is assumed that a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) for switching from a normal screen background to a predetermined screen background is started at the time shown in FIG. 136 (c) thereafter. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, each hold icon, etc. are hidden, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen.

  Thereafter, the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, a symbol combination “decoration other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 7-decoration 6-decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time (FIG. 136 (d)). When returning to the normal screen background, the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 in the hold icon display area 900 is resumed. In this example, at least when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. For example, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be arranged at the timing when the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 is resumed (during fluctuation of the symbol combination), or arranged at the timing when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, although not shown, the symbols may be arranged at the timing when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214.

  As an arrangement method of the animation mode of the hold icon, the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903 may be aligned with the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901 or 902, or the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901 or 902 is The animation mode of the hold icon 903 may be aligned, or the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be aligned with the reference (eg, initial state) animation mode.

  Moreover, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be aligned at the timing when the symbol combination for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the subsequent big hit effect ends (for example, the hold icon 901 after the big hit effect ends) ˜903 when the display is resumed).

(Example 3-7)
FIG. 137 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-7 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (d) show the state during and at the end of the fluctuation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 137 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 137 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position.

  It is assumed that a special effect for switching from a normal screen background to a predetermined screen background is started at the time shown in FIG. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, each hold icon, etc. are hidden. In addition, during this special performance, it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one.

  Thereafter, the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, a symbol combination “decoration other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 7-decoration 6-decoration 7 ") is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time (FIG. 137 (d)). When returning to the normal screen background, the display of the hold icons 901 and 902 is resumed, and the display of a new hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started. In this example, when the display of the hold icon 903 is started, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. That is, the hold icon 903 starts to be displayed in an animation mode that matches the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

(Example 3-8)
FIG. 138 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-8 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 (c) show the state during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 138 (a) and (b) are the same as FIGS. 136 (b) and (c) of Example 3-6.

  After the state shown in FIG. 138 (b), the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, a hit is notified in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). The symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination to be displayed is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation of the predetermined time (FIG. 138 (c)). The display of the hold icons 901 to 903 in the hold icon display area 900 is resumed when returning to the normal screen background. In this example, unlike Example 3-6, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 even when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 may be aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 at a predetermined timing (for example, the same timing as that of the above-described or later embodiments).

(Example 3-9)
FIG. 139 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-9 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (d) show a state from the variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game to after the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 139 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “price” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 139 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 139 (c), the special figure 1 variable game ends. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 139 (d), the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Based on the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon 901 is deleted with a predetermined deletion animation, for example. The hold icons 902 and 903 move from the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 to the first and second areas, respectively, with a predetermined moving animation, for example. At this point, the animation modes of the two hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned. The timing at which the animation modes of the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned may be, for example, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable game is started, or the timing at which the movement of the hold icons 902 and 903 is completed. The timing at which the movement of the hold icons 902 and 903 is started may be the timing at which the hold icons 902 and 903 are being moved. In this example, regardless of the animation mode immediately before each of the hold icons 902 and 903, they are arranged in a predetermined animation mode. For this reason, the rotation of the hold icons 902 and 903 may be discontinuous. The animation mode to be aligned may be an animation mode (first frame) in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, or may be an animation mode other than that.

  Here, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned at the timing when the symbol combination for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the fluctuation period shown in FIGS. 139 (a) and (b). It may be arranged at the timing when the subsequent big hit effect is finished.

(Example 3-10)
FIG. 140 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-10 of the present embodiment in time series. 140 (a) to 140 (d) show a state from the variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game to after the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 140A to 140C are the same as FIGS. 139A to 139c of Example 3-9.

  At the time shown in FIG. 140 (d), the following special figure 1 variable game is started. Based on the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon 901 is deleted with a predetermined deletion animation, for example. The hold icons 902 and 903 move from the second and third areas of the hold icon display area 900 to the first and second areas, respectively, with a predetermined moving animation, for example. At this time (for example, when the special figure 1 variable game is started, when the hold icons 902 and 903 are moved, when the hold icons 902 and 903 are moved, when the hold icons 902 and 903 are moving At the timing), the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 902. The present embodiment is different from Embodiment 3-9 in that the rotation of the hold icon 902 is not discontinuous.

(Example 3-11)
FIG. 141 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-11 of the present embodiment in time series. At the time shown in FIG. 141 (a), the effect mode (effect state) is the predetermined mode A. At this time, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 903 (display mode) of FIG. 1 are all displayed in the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900. : White) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this point in time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the effect mode is switched from mode A to another mode B at the time shown in FIG. 141 (b). This switching of the effect mode may be based on the player's operation or may not be based on the player's operation. Further, the switching of the effect mode may be accompanied by switching of the control state (internal state) of the pachinko machine 100, or may not be accompanied by switching of the control state. In this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902 at the timing when the effect mode is switched from mode A to mode B. As a method of aligning the animation mode of the hold icon, the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901, 902 may be aligned with the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903, or the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 is a reference (for example, The animation state in the initial state may be aligned. Moreover, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be arranged only when the effect mode is switched to a specific mode.

(Example 3-12)
FIG. 142 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-12 of the present embodiment in time series. At the time shown in FIG. 142 (a), the control state of the pachinko machine 100 is a predetermined state (for example, a probability variation state). At this time, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 903 (display mode) of FIG. 1 are all displayed in the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900. : White) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this point in time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 142 (b), it is assumed that one hold is consumed and the control state is switched from a predetermined state to another state (for example, a normal state). Here, the switching of the control state may be accompanied by a change of the production state, or may not be accompanied by a change of the production state. In this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 902 at the timing when the control state is switched from a predetermined state to another state. As an arrangement method of the animation mode of the hold icon, the animation mode of the previous hold icon 902 may be aligned with the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903, or the animation mode of the hold icons 902 and 903 is set as the reference animation mode. May be aligned. For example, in the case of the falling lottery type, when the control state is switched based on winning the falling lottery, the animation mode of the hold icon may not be aligned.

(Example 3-13)
FIG. 143 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-13 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (d) show the state during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 143 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 143 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 143 (c), a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) for switching from a normal screen background to a predetermined screen background is started. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800 is hidden, and the hold icon display area 900 moves to the right corner of the screen and is deformed vertically. In the hold icon display area 900 moved to the right corner of the screen, the hold icons 901 to 903 are reduced and displayed vertically. In the area near the hold icon display area 900, the number of holds may be displayed as a number.

  In this example, when the position of the hold icon display area 900 changes, when the shape of the hold icon display area 900 changes, when the position of the hold icons 901 to 903 changes, or the display size of the hold icons 901 to 903 At the timing when changes are made, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. With the reduced hold icons 901 to 903, the standby animation may be executed as before the reduction, or may not be executed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 143 (d), the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and the display of the hold icon display area 900 and the hold icons 901 to 903 returns. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time. .

  When the standby animation of the hold icons 901 to 903 is not executed during the special effect, the standby animation when the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 is restored is, for example, the initial animation mode (first frame). Starts from. When the standby animation of the hold icons 901 to 903 is executed during the special effect, the standby animation when the display of the hold icons 901 to 903 returns to the original state is, for example, the animation state in the initial state, or when the special effect ends. The animation mode (or the next frame) or the animation mode (or the next frame) immediately before the start of the special effect is started.

(Example 3-14)
FIG. 144 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-14 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (d) show the state during and at the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 144 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 144 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 144 (c), a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) for switching from the normal screen background to the predetermined screen background is started. In this example, during the special effect, the variable icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, and the hold icons 901 to 903 are hidden, and the hold number is displayed as a number in the area at the right corner of the screen.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 144 (d), the special effect ends, the screen background for the special effect returns to the normal screen background, and the hold icon display area 900 and the hold icons 901 to 903 are displayed again. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a predetermined symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed after fluctuation for a predetermined time. .

  In this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are arranged at the timing when the hold icons 901 to 903 are redisplayed after the special effect ends. The standby animations of the hold icons 901 to 903 after the re-display are, for example, the animation state in the initial state, the animation mode (or the next frame) immediately before the start of the special effects of the previous hold icons 901 and 902, and the subsequent hold icon 903. Starts from one of the animation modes (or the next frame) immediately before the start of the special performance.

(Example 3-15)
FIG. 145 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-15 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 145 (a) and 145 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 145 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white), and the hold icon 902 of FIG. A hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  Assume that the display mode of the hold icon 901 changes from white to another display mode (for example, blue) based on the prefetching result at the time shown in FIG. 145 (b). When the display mode of the hold icon changes, a predetermined change animation may be accompanied. In this example, the timing at which the display mode (for example, color) of the previous hold icon 901 changes (for example, when a change animation is involved, the timing at which the change animation is started, the timing at which the change animation ends, or the change animation In the middle), the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. Note that the animation mode of the hold icon 903 may be aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902 at the timing when the display mode of the subsequent hold icon 903 changes. At the timing when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the player pays attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, so that even if the animation mode of the hold icon is aligned, it may be possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. is there.

(Example 3-16)
FIG. 146 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-16 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time point shown in FIG. 146 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 146 (b). In addition, this hold is a prefetch target hold, and prefetch notifications regarding the increased hold and the previous hold are collectively executed when the hold increases. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon 903 is, for example, red for notifying the success or failure of the hold with relatively high reliability. Further, the display mode of the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 changes from white (default) to, for example, red. The change in the display mode may be accompanied by a predetermined change animation. The display mode of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 remains white.

  In this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are arranged at the timing when the prefetch notifications for a plurality of holds are collectively executed. That is, in this example, the animation mode of the newly displayed hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the previous hold icons 901 and 902 when the display of the hold icon 903 is started. In this example, the display mode of the hold icon 901 remains white, but the display mode of the hold icon 901 may be changed to a predetermined display mode.

(Example 3-17)
147 to 148 show examples of effect display in Example 3-17 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 147 (a) to FIG. 148 (b) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 147 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. At the time point shown in FIG. 147 (b) thereafter, the animation modes of the two hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned.

  It is assumed that the hold (pre-reading target hold) in Special Figure 1 has increased at the time shown in FIG. 147 (c) thereafter. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed, and a standby animation is started. The display mode of the hold icon 903 is “red”, for example. The hold icon 903 may be displayed in the state of the display mode “red” from the beginning, or may be changed to the display mode “red” after being displayed in the default display mode (for example, white). When the display mode changes from default to “red”, a predetermined change animation may be accompanied. When the hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902. After the hold icon 903 is displayed, an effect moving image representing an aura is displayed around the hold icon 903 (back side) as an example of a prefetch change mode (FIGS. 147 (d) and 148 (a). )).

  At the time shown in FIG. 148 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are both in the initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position. At the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. At this point, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 148 (b)).

  FIGS. 149 (a) and (b) show a state after FIGS. 147 (a) to (d) as a modification of the present embodiment. At the time point shown in FIG. 149 (a), the hold icons 901 and 902 are both in an initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. At this time, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 149 (b), the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 ends. In this example, when the display of the effect moving image ends, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned. Note that the animation mode of the hold icon is aligned after the display of the effect moving image ends, and the animation mode of the hold icon 901 and 902 is set to a predetermined mode (for example, the first time). It may be when it becomes (state).

(Example 3-18)
FIG. 150 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-18 of this embodiment in time series. 150 (a) to 150 (d) show states from the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game to the start after the next special figure 1 variable game is started. At the time shown in FIG. 150 (a), a certain special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is stopped and displayed. In the first to third areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icon 901 (display mode: white), the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 150 (b), the next special figure 1 variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started.

  In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 801 and jumps from the first area to the upper left first, and then to the lower left. It moves down and moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800 located on the left side of the first area (FIGS. 150B and 150C). Here, even after the hold icon 901 becomes the change icon 801, the standby animation is continuously executed. In this example, the fluctuation icon 801 is erased when moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800, but the fluctuation icon 801 moved to the fluctuation icon display area 800 is displayed as it is until the end of the fluctuation. Also good.

  The movement animation of the hold icon is executed in the same manner as the movement animation between the hold / change icon. That is, in the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 first jumps from the second area to the upper left and then lowers to the lower left, and the left of the second area. Move to the first area located next to it. The hold icon 903 displayed in the third area also moves to the second area in the same manner.

  In this example, the image of each icon during the movement animation (the standby animation is also running) is the same as the image of each icon when the standby animation is being executed independently, but the standby animation is being executed independently. The image may be a different image from the above, or the images may be common and different in size. Further, the standby animation may be interrupted during the movement animation.

  Further, in this example, the movement animation of the fluctuation icon 801 (hold icon 901), the movement animation of the hold icon 902, and the movement animation of the hold icon 903 are all executed simultaneously in synchronization with each other in the same manner. Need not be executed at the same time. For example, the image of the icon itself may be different between the movement animation of the fluctuation icon 801 (movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon) and the movement animation of the hold icons 902 and 903, and the size of the icon itself may be different. It may be different or only the size may be different. In addition, the execution times of the moving animations may or may not overlap.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 150 (b), the variation icon 801 and the hold icon 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the change icon 801 and the hold icon 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 150 (c), each moving animation ends, and the change icon 801 is deleted. At this time, the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Thus, in this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 and the animation mode of the hold icon 902 are aligned at the timing when each moving animation is completed. Thereafter, the hold icons 902 and 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 150 (d)).

(Example 3-19)
FIG. 151 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-19 of the present embodiment in time series. 151 (a) to 151 (d) show a state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. FIG. 151 (a) is the same as FIG. 150 (a).

  The next special figure 1 variation game is started at the time shown in FIG. 151 (b), and the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are started as in FIG. 150 (b). At this time, the change icon 801 and the hold icons 902 and 903 are arranged in an animation mode in which “Year” is the normal position. Thus, in this example, the animation mode of the hold icon 903 and the animation mode of the variation icon 801 and the hold icon 902 are aligned at the timing when each moving animation is started. Thereafter, with the change icon 801 and the hold icons 902 and 903, the movement animation and the standby animation are executed in a state where the animation modes are aligned (FIGS. 151 (c) and (d)).

(Example 3-20)
152 and 153 show examples of effect display in Example 3-20 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 152 (a) to 153 (b) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 152 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Even at the time shown in FIG. 152 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 152 (c). Here, in this example, the new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900 at a predetermined synchronization timing that arrives at a predetermined cycle (in this example, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is in the initial state). Timing) only. At the time shown in FIG. 152 (c), since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of the new hold icon in the third area is delayed (in the figure, the display of the hold icon in the third area is delayed). Is represented by a dashed circle). Although not shown in the figure, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the holding of special figure 1 has increased at this time.

  Even at the time shown in FIG. 152 (d) after that, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is a mode in which “yo” is the normal position, and since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of a new hold icon is delayed.

Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 153 (a), the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is in the initial state in which “8” is the normal position, and a predetermined synchronization timing arrives. Accordingly, display of a new hold icon 903 based on the hold increase at the time of FIG. 152 (c) is started at this timing. Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 903 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 153 (b)).
(Example 3-21)
FIG. 154 and FIG. 155 show examples of effect display in Example 3-21 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 154 (a) to FIG. 155 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 154 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Even at the time shown in FIG. 154 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. 154 (c), the suspension of Special Figure 1 has increased by one. Here, in this example, as in Example 3-20, a new hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 900 at a predetermined synchronization timing that arrives at a predetermined cycle (in this example, the hold icon 901, Only the timing at which the animation mode 902 is in the initial state). At the time shown in FIG. 154 (c), since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of a new hold icon in the third area is delayed.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is further increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 154 (d) thereafter. At this point in time, the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is a mode in which “yo” is the normal position, and since it is not the synchronization timing, the display of a new hold icon in the fourth area is also delayed.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 155 (a), the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is in the initial state in which “8” is the normal position, and a predetermined synchronization timing arrives. Accordingly, a new hold icon 903 based on the hold increase at the time of FIG. 154 (c) and a new hold icon 904 based on the hold increase at the time of FIG. 154 (d) are simultaneously displayed at this timing. . Thereafter, the hold icons 901 to 904 rotate clockwise with the animation modes aligned (FIG. 155 (b)). In this example, an example in which two suspensions continuously increase between the predetermined synchronization timing and the next synchronization timing has been described, but the suspension is performed between the predetermined synchronization timing and the next synchronization timing. The same applies to the case where two are increased simultaneously.

(Example 3-22)
156 and 157 show examples of effect display in Example 3-22 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 156 (a) to FIG. 157 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 156 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. Even at the time shown in FIG. 156 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 156 (c), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 is increased by one. In addition, as the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Sabohani” having a different outer shape from the default display mode is selected based on the pre-read result or the like. A new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In the standby animation of this example, it is assumed that three frames (for example, textures T001 to T003 in FIG. 81D) are periodically repeated. At the time shown in FIG. 156 (c), the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an initial animation state (for example, T001 in FIG. 81 (d)).

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 156 (d), the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which the “price” is the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in the animation mode of the next frame in the initial state (for example, T002 in FIG. 81 (d)).

  At the time shown in FIG. 157 (a) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which “eight” is the normal position. In this example, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state at the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state. That is, at this time, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned.

  At the time shown in FIG. 157 (b) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 becomes an animation mode of the next frame in the initial state.

(Example 3-23)
FIG. 158 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-23 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 158 (a) and 158 (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. Prior to the time shown in FIG. 158 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) in FIG. 1 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and the time shown in FIG. 158 (a). Then, it is assumed that the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one and a new hold icon 902 (display mode: red) is started to be displayed in the second area. The hold icon 901 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 902 is in an animation state in an initial state where “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon. In this example, when a hold icon with a display mode “red” is newly displayed, a predetermined effect moving image (FIG. 147 (d), FIG. 148 (a), etc. Is displayed around the hold icon. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 158 (a), an effect moving image is scheduled to be displayed around the newly displayed hold icon 902.

  Then, at the time shown in FIG. 158 (b), it is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased by one. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the display mode “savohani” has higher reliability than the display mode “red”. In this example, the look-ahead change mode (for example, display of the effect image) of the hold icon of the display mode “red” is canceled when a new hold icon is displayed thereafter. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 158 (b), the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 902 is canceled based on the display of the new hold icon 903 after the hold icon 902 itself. . Canceling the display of the effect moving image may be performed before starting the display of the effect moving image, or may be performed after starting the display of the effect moving image. The display of the effect moving image for the hold icon 902 is canceled when a hold icon that satisfies a specific condition (for example, a hold icon with higher reliability than the hold icon 902) is newly displayed. If a hold icon that does not satisfy is newly displayed, it may not be canceled.

(Example 3-24)
FIG. 159 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-24 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 159 (a) and (b) show a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 902 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. In addition, as a display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Sabohani” is selected based on the prefetch result or the like. A new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In this example, at the timing when the hold icon 903 with high reliability is newly displayed, the animation mode of each of the hold icons 901 to 903 is aligned with the animation mode in the initial state, for example. That is, at this time, all of the hold icons 901 to 903 are in the animation state in the initial state.

(Example 3-25)
FIG. 160 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-25 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 160 (a) and 160 (b) show a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: blue) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. Is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 902 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901. That is, in this example, since the reliability of the hold icon 902 is not so high, when the hold icon 902 increases, the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902 are not aligned.

  Assume that at the time shown in FIG. In addition, as a display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Sabohani” is selected based on the prefetch result or the like. A new hold icon 903 (display mode: Sabohani) is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900, and a predetermined standby animation is executed. In this example, at the timing when the hold icon 903 with high reliability is newly displayed, the animation mode of each of the hold icons 901 to 903 is aligned with the animation mode in the initial state, for example. That is, at this time, all of the hold icons 901 to 903 are in the animation state in the initial state. Note that the animation mode of each of the hold icons 901 to 903 may be arranged only at the timing when the hold icon having a display mode (for example, Sabohani) having a different external shape from the default display mode is displayed.

(Example 3-26)
FIG. 161 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-26 of the present embodiment in time series. 161 (a) to 161 (d) show states during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 161 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. Further, an increase animation of the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) is started in the third area based on the fact that the hold in FIG. 1 has increased by one. In each of the hold icons 901 to 903, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 to 903 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that at the time shown in FIG. 161 (b), before the increase animation of the hold icon 903 ends, the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one. Based on the increase in the hold, an increase animation of the hold icon 904 (display mode: white) is started in the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900. In this example, when a new increase animation in the fourth area is started, the increase animation of the previous hold icon 903 in the third area is canceled (skipped). At this time point, the hold icons 901 to 904 are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. Thereafter, while the hold icons 901 to 904 maintain the state in which the animation modes are aligned, the increase animation of the hold icon 904 is continued in the fourth region (FIGS. 161 (c) and (d)).

(Example 3-27)
FIG. 162 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-27 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (c) show a state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 162 (a), the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The The hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, and a standby animation is executed. Yes. Further, at this point, the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by 1, and a hold icon 903 (display mode: red) is newly displayed in the third area. At the time point shown in FIG. 162 (a), an effect moving image as an example of a prefetch change mode is scheduled to be displayed around the newly displayed hold icon 903. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 162 (b), the next special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative symbol variable display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. These moving animations are executed in the same manner as in Example 3-18. Even during the execution of these moving animations, the standby animation is continuously executed. In this example, the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 is canceled based on the movement animation of the hold icon 903 being executed. Further, in this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned at the timing when the movement animation ends (FIG. 162 (c)).

(Example 3-28)
FIG. 163 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-28 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 163 (a) to (d) show the state from the end of a special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. Since FIG. 163 (a)-(c) is the same as that of FIG. 162 (a)-(c), description is abbreviate | omitted. In this example, based on the movement animation of the hold icon 903 being executed, the display of the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 is postponed until the end of the movement animation. Therefore, after the movement animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 163 (d), a predetermined effect moving image is displayed around the hold icon 903 increased before the movement animation is started.
(Example 3-29)
FIG. 164 shows an example of effect display in Example 3-29 of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (d) show a state from the end of a certain special figure 1 variable game to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. FIG. 164 (a) is the same as FIG. 162 (a). At the time shown in FIG. 164 (b), the next special figure 1 variable game is started, and the decorative display of the decorative symbols is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900, a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the hold icon are started. These moving animations are executed in the same manner as in Example 3-18. Even during the execution of these moving animations, the standby animation is continuously executed. In this example, the effect moving image around the hold icon 903 is displayed even while the moving animation is being executed. The display of the effect image starts, for example, almost simultaneously with the start of the moving animation, and ends almost simultaneously with the end of the moving animation. Further, in this example, the animation modes of the hold icons 902 and 903 are aligned at the timing when the movement animation ends (FIGS. 164 (c) and (d)). The effect moving image may be displayed overlapping with other reserved icons 902 and decorative symbols. In this case, the effect moving image may be displayed behind or behind the other on-hold icon 902 or the decorative design.

(Example 3-30)
FIG. 165 and FIG. 166 show examples of effect display in Example 3-30 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 165 (a) to FIG. 166 (b) show the state during the fluctuation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 165 (a), the hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the hold icon 902 (display mode: white) of FIG. 1 are both present in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates clockwise is executed. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned in the initial animation mode in which “8” is the normal position. At the time shown in FIG. 165 (b) thereafter, the two hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 1 has increased at the time shown in FIG. 165 (c) thereafter. In the third area of the hold icon display area 900, a new hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed, and a standby animation is started. The initial display mode of the hold icon 903 is “white”, and the next display mode (for example, the final display mode) that is changed at a predetermined timing is “red”. At this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The increased hold icon 903 is in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position, and is not aligned with the animation modes of the hold icons 901 and 902. Here, after the hold icon 903 is newly displayed in the initial display mode “white”, it changes to the next display mode “red” at the timing when the previous hold icon becomes the initial animation mode. At this time, since the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is not in the initial state, the display mode of the hold icon 903 remains “white”.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 165 (d), the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation mode in which “Yo” is in the normal position, and the hold icon 903 is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position. Even at this time, since the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 is not in the initial state, the display mode of the hold icon 903 remains “white”.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 166 (a) thereafter, the hold icons 901 and 902 are in an animation state in an initial state in which “8” is a normal position. At the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 are in the initial animation mode, the hold icon 903 is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902. Thereby, the animation modes of the three hold icons 901 to 903 are aligned. Further, the display mode of the hold icon 903 is switched from “white” to “red” at the timing when the hold icons 901 and 902 are in the initial animation state.

  Thereafter, at the time shown in FIG. 166 (b), an effect moving image is displayed around the hold icon 903.

(Example 3-31)
In the above Examples 3-1 to 3-30, the hold icon of FIG. 1 was described as an example, but it is of course possible to combine the hold icon of FIG. FIG. 167 (a) shows an example in which the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area 900. FIG. In this example, the hold icon display area 900 is roughly divided into two on the left and right. The left part of the hold icon display area 900 is a special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, and the right part is a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960. Each of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 can display a maximum of four hold icons in a left-justified manner, and the four first to fourth areas from left to right. It is divided into areas. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth holding ranks in each of FIG. 1 and FIG. In FIG. 167 (a), four special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 904 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, and the first of the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is displayed. In the fourth area, four special figure 2 hold icons 911 to 914 are displayed. The shape of the special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 904 is circular, and the shape of the special figure 2 hold icons 911 to 914 is a square different from the shape of the special figure 1 hold icon.

  FIGS. 167 (b) and (c) show an example different from FIG. 167 (a). In this example, the hold icon display area 900 can display a maximum of eight hold icons in a left-justified manner and is divided into eight areas of first to eighth areas from left to right. In this example, in the first to eighth areas of the hold icon display area 900, the hold icons with higher priority are displayed on the left side (first area side). In the case of the special figure 2 priority change machine, the special figure 2 hold icon on the priority change side has a higher priority than the special figure 1 hold icon, and in each of the special figure 2 and special figure 1 the higher the priority is, the earlier hold icon. . That is, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game to be executed next is arranged in the first area adjacent to the variable icon display area 800. In FIG. 167 (b), four special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 904 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900. In FIG. 167 (c), four special figure 2 hold icons 911 to 914 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and four special figure 1 hold icons are displayed in the fifth to eighth areas. 901 to 904 are displayed.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure variable game in the example shown in FIGS. 167 (b) and (c). At the time shown in FIG. 168 (a), the special figure 1 hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and the special figure 1 hold icon 902 (display mode: white) are displayed in the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900. It is displayed. In each of the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902, a standby animation that rotates in the clockwise direction is executed. At this time, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 are arranged in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position.

  It is assumed that the suspension of special figure 2 has increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 168 (b) thereafter. Based on the increase in the hold on the priority change side, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 in the first and second areas move to the second and third areas, respectively. When the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 move, the above-described evacuation animation may be accompanied. In addition, a special figure 2 hold icon 911 is newly displayed in the first area. When the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is newly displayed, a predetermined increase animation may be accompanied. At this time, the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 in the second and third areas are aligned in an animation mode in which “general” is in the normal position. The special figure 2 hold icon 911 in the first area is in an initial animation state in which “8” is the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation form of the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time shown in FIG. 168 (c) after that, the special figure 1 holding icons 901 and 902 in the second and third areas are arranged in an animation mode in which “yo” is the normal position. The special map 2 hold icon 911 in the first area is in an animation mode in which “army” is in the normal position, and is not aligned with the animation mode of the special map 1 hold icons 901 and 902.

  At the time point shown in FIG. 168 (d) thereafter, the special figure 1 holding icons 901 and 902 in the second and third areas are aligned in an initial animation state in which “eight” is the normal position. At the timing when the special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 902 become the animation state in the initial state, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is aligned with the animation state in the initial state where “8” is the normal position. At this point, three hold icons 901, 902, and 911 are aligned. This example is common to Example 3-1 and the like in that the retained icon 911 that is increased later matches the animation mode of the retained icons 901 and 902 that are increased earlier, but the retained icon 911 corresponding to the previous change is used. Is different from the embodiment 3-1 and the like in that it matches the animation mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 corresponding to later changes.

  FIGS. 169 (a) and (b) are diagrams for explaining a phenomenon that may occur when an image is reduced. When an image (for example, a holding icon) is reduced by the VDP compression / enlargement function, the aspect ratio may change. For example, the image 1001 in FIG. 169 (a) and the image 1002 in FIG. 169 (b) have a circular outer shape and a 3 × 4 horizontal pattern attached to the outer shape. On the other hand, in images 1011 and 1012 in which the vertical and horizontal directions of these images 1001 and 1002 are reduced to ½, the pattern changes to horizontal 3 × vertical 3. Here, the line width of the edge of the pattern may be reduced or may not be reduced. In such a case, considering that the same image data is used, the image 1001 (image 1002) and the image 1011 (image 1012) have the same mode (for example, shape, pattern, color, etc.) and only the size. Can be considered different. Considering that the aspect ratios of the patterns actually displayed are different, it can be considered that the image 1001 (image 1002) and the image 1011 (image 1012) have different modes and sizes.

  170A to 170C are diagrams for explaining what kind of texture data needs to be provided when displaying an animation for enlarging / reducing an image. In this example, while executing a standby animation in which an image (for example, a hold icon) is enlarged or reduced as time passes as shown in FIG. 170 (a), the image is further enlarged / reduced as shown in FIG. 170 (b). Execute the moving animation to move. For example, the movement animation is started at the timing when the image in the standby animation becomes the maximum size. In this case, as shown in FIG. 170 (c), the image size range enlarged / reduced by the standby animation is individually provided with texture data, and the image size range enlarged / reduced by the moving animation is provided with texture data. Instead, any of the texture data for standby animation may be enlarged or reduced by the VDP function. Further, for the range of the image size that is enlarged / reduced by the moving animation, one texture data may be provided for the moving animation, and the texture data may be enlarged / reduced by the VDP function. Also, individual texture data may be provided for the range of the image size that is enlarged or reduced by the moving animation.

  171 (a) to 171 (d) are diagrams for explaining a phenomenon that can occur when the transparency is changed. In an image (for example, a hold icon) displayed in gradation as shown in FIG. 171 (a), when the transparency is increased, it gradually becomes transparent from a lightly colored part (right part in the figure) as shown in FIG. 171 (b). Becomes invisible. For this reason, when the animation which increases / decreases transparency using the same image data is performed, it may be visually recognized so that the aspect (for example, a shape, a pattern, a color) of a display image may change in the said animation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 171 (c), when an animation for increasing / decreasing transparency is executed using a character image “Large” whose color is lighter toward the right side, the shape of the right side portion of the character image “Large” in the animation is particularly large. It may be visually recognized to change. In addition, as shown in FIG. 171 (d), an animation for increasing / decreasing transparency using a character string image including four character images “eight”, “large”, “general”, and “military” whose colors become lighter in order. When executed, the character string image “eight majors” may be visually recognized as “eight majors”, “eight majors”, “eights”, and the like in the animation.

  Considering that the same image data is used in the above case, this animation can be considered as an animation in which the aspect is the same and only the transparency is changed. Further, in consideration of the fact that the actually displayed mode is different, this animation can be considered as an animation in which the mode and the transparency change.

  FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) are diagrams illustrating overlapping display between the hold icons or between the hold icon and another image. A hold icon 991 shown in FIG. 172 (a) has a main body portion 991a that is a main part of the hold display and an additional portion 991b (effect image) that is an additional part of the hold display. When the hold icon 991 is displayed overlapping with another image (for example, another hold icon or an image other than the hold icon (including a decorative pattern)), the main body portion 991a is displayed in front of the other image. The additional portion 991b may be displayed in the back of another image. Further, both the main body portion 991a and the additional portion 991b may be displayed in front of other images. Further, both the main body portion 991a and the additional portion 991b may be displayed in the back of another image. Further, the main body portion 991a may be displayed in the back of another image, and the additional portion 991b may be displayed in front of the other image. Further, the additional portion 991b may overlap with other images, but the main body portion 991a may not overlap with other images. Further, both the main body portion 991a and the additional portion 991b may not overlap with other images.

  FIG. 172 (b) shows an example of a standby icon standby animation (corresponding to FIG. 81 (b)). When this standby animation is executed, the hold icon first rotates once, and then stops rotating and remains stationary in the initial state. The initial rotation of the hold icon can also be considered part or all of the increase animation of the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold icon may be rotated at least twice instead of once, and may remain stationary after the rotation is stopped in another state, or once or A combination of a plurality of rotations and stationary for a predetermined time may be repeated at a predetermined cycle. When such an animation is executed, the hold icon may not overlap with another image (for example, another hold icon or an image other than the hold icon) during the first rotation period. Even if it overlaps with the other image, the hold icon may be displayed in front of other images. Further, during the first rotation period, a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change in prefetching) may not be performed. As a result, it may be noted that the holding has increased.

  173 to 175 show examples of the animation of the hold icon. In the animation of the holding icon of the princess character shown in FIG. 173 (a), an image with the princess facing to the right (left in the figure) (animation mode 1, initial state) and an image with the princess facing to the front (Animation mode 2) and an image (animation mode 3) with the princess facing to the left (right in the figure) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. In the animation of the hold icon of the chief character shown in FIG. 173 (b), an image (animation mode 1, initial state) where the chief is facing right (left in the figure) and an image where the chief is facing front (Animation mode 2) and an image (animation mode 3) in which the number is facing to the left (right in the figure) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. The animation shown in FIG. 173 (a) is different from the animation shown in FIG. 173 (b), but the scale of one cycle and the animation mode in each frame (in other words, direction, action, action, pose) are common. doing.

  In the animation of the reserved icon of the princess character shown in FIG. 174 (a), an image with the princess facing right (animation mode 1, initial state) and an image with the princess facing the front (animation mode 2) , And an image with the princess facing left (animation mode 3) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. In the animation of the hold icon of the watchdog character shown in FIG. 174 (b), an image in which the watchmaker is facing right (animation mode 1, initial state), and an image in which the watchmaster is facing front (animation mode 2) The image in which the number is facing left (animation mode 3) and the image in which the number is facing front (animation mode 2) are repeatedly displayed in sequence. Although the animation shown in FIG. 174 (a) and the animation shown in FIG. 174 (b) are different in character and scale of one cycle, there are many identical portions (common portions) in the animation mode.

  In the animation of the reserved icon of the princess character shown in FIG. 175 (a), an image with the princess facing the front (animation mode 2, initial state), and an image with the princess facing the left (animation mode 3), An image with the princess facing front (animation mode 2), an image with the princess facing left (animation mode 3), and an image with the princess facing right (animation mode 1) Displayed sequentially and repeatedly. In the animation of the hold icon of the chief character shown in FIG. 175 (b), an image in which the chief is facing the front (animation mode 2, initial state), and an image in which the number is facing the left (animation mode 3) The image with the number length facing left (animation mode 1) and the image with the number length facing left (animation mode 3) are sequentially displayed repeatedly. The animation shown in FIG. 175 (a) and the animation shown in FIG. 175 (b) have the same part (common part) in the animation mode, although the characters and the scale of one cycle are different. For example, both animations include both images with each character facing right, but the number of frames from the initial state is different (fifth frame for the princess character animation and third frame for the animation of the Bancho character).

  176 and 177 show an example of the hold display in time series. At the time point shown in FIG. 176 (a), it is assumed that the special figure variable game is in a variable period and there is one hold. In the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: princess) is displayed, and a standby animation (repeating four frames of animation modes 1, 2, 3, 2) is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in the animation state 1 (rightward) in the initial state. At the time shown in FIG. 176 (b) thereafter, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing).

  It is assumed that the hold is increased by one at the time shown in FIG. 176 (c). In the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 (display mode: number length) is newly displayed, and a standby animation (repeating four frames of animation modes 1, 2, 3, and 2) is executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in the animation mode 3 (leftward). The hold icon 902 is in the initial animation mode 1 (rightward), and is not aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  At the time shown in FIG. 176 (d), the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing). The hold icon 902 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing), and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  At the time shown in FIG. 177 (a), the hold icon 901 is in the initial animation mode 1 (rightward). At this point, the synchronization control is executed based on the fact that the hold icon 901 is in the initial animation mode 1, and the animation mode of the subsequent hold icon 902 is aligned with the animation mode of the previous hold icon 901. Thereby, the animation mode of the hold icon 902 becomes the animation mode 1 (rightward) in the initial state. As a result, even at this time, the hold icons 901 and 902 have the same animation mode.

  At the time shown in FIG. 177 (b) thereafter, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing). The hold icon 902 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing), and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  FIG. 178 shows another example of the hold display in time series. At the time shown in FIG. 178 (a), it is assumed that there is two suspensions during the variation period of the special figure variation game. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, a fluctuation icon 801 (display mode: white (default)) corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed. In the first and second areas of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: princess) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: Bancho) are displayed, and standby animations are respectively executed. At this time, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 2 (front-facing). The hold icon 902 is an animation mode 2 (front-facing) and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  At the time shown in FIG. 178 (b) thereafter, the hold icon 901 is in animation mode 3 (leftward). The hold icon 902 becomes the animation mode 3 (leftward), and is aligned with the animation mode of the hold icon 901.

  It is assumed that the display mode of the change icon 801 changes from the default “white” to “thousand boxes” at the time shown in FIG. 178 (c) thereafter. The change in the display mode may be accompanied by a predetermined change animation. In this example, with the change in the display mode of the variation icon 801, the hold icons 901 and 902 are aligned with the animation mode 1 (rightward) in which each character faces the variation icon 801 side.

  FIG. 179 shows a modification of the types of special drawings, decorative symbols, and ordinary drawings in the present embodiment. In FIG. 179 (a), ten types of special drawings “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing J” are shown as the stop symbols of the special drawings 1 and 2. "Special figure A" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol, "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable), and "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol (Special figure E) is a 2R big hit symbol (hidden probability change), "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol (sudden normal), and "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, “Special figure I” is the first off symbol, and “Special figure J” is the second off symbol.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” or 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  2R big hit called "special figure E" hidden probability change, 2R big hit suddenly called "special figure F", or first special hit of "special figure G", second of "special figure H" When notifying the small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. When notifying 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “Special Figure C” or 2R jackpot called “Short Time Reduction” of “Special Figure D”, “Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 179 (b) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. .

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined hold storage condition is established, holds a predetermined storage information as a hold storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 disturbance). A hold display means (for example, a decorative pattern) capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold when a predetermined hold display condition is satisfied when a numerical value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) is established. A display device 208, a hold icon display area 900, a first sub control unit 400, and a second sub control unit 500), and the hold display means animates the hold icon (for example, a standby icon standby animation, an increase). (Animation, moving animation, erasing animation, moving animation between hold and change icons) To.

  According to this configuration, the entertainment of the game can be improved by displaying the hold icon as an animation.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display means can display the plurality of hold icons by animation. For example, all of the plurality of displayed hold icons may be displayed with animation, or only some of the plurality of displayed hold icons may be displayed with animation.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, if a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, a determination unit that can execute at least determination of success / failure (for example, a special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229), FIG. 1). It further has a related lottery process (step S231)).

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined symbol variation condition is satisfied, after symbol variation is performed, at least a symbol variation stop display that stops and displays the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination is performed. It further has an executable symbol display means (for example, the special symbol display device 212, the special symbol 2 display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device 208).

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, main control means (for example, main control unit 300) that performs control related to the progress of the game, and sub-control that performs control based on the control command transmitted from the main control means. Control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500), and the hold display means can display the hold icon based on the control of the sub-control means. And

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, the timing which arranges the animation aspect of a several pending | holding icon may be the start timing of a special figure variable game. Here, the start timing of the special figure variable game may be a timing at which the special figure variable display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, or It may be the timing at which the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when the variation start timing of each decorative symbol does not match in each of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, it may be the first variation start timing of the three decorative symbols. It may be the change start timing of the third symbol, or may be the change start timing of the third symbol. Or you may make it align the animation aspect of a several hold | maintained icon only at the change start timing of the first symbol among three decoration symbols.

  In this embodiment or another embodiment, at least one of the shape, pattern, color, transparency, size, position, rotation angle, and the like of the icon, hold icon, and variable icon changes over time. Includes things. That is, the animation of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon may be one in which the shape of the icon changes, or one in which the shape does not change. For example, only the color may change without changing the shape of the icon.

  In this embodiment or other embodiments, the various animations for the hold icon and the change icon may be a sprite or a movie.

  Each embodiment and various examples described above can be implemented in combination with each other.

  In the present invention, a pachinko machine is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine, an arrangement ball game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, a smart ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are used in a circulating manner. You may apply to an enclosure-type game machine etc.

  The game table according to the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.

(Appendix 1)
When a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as hold,
When a predetermined hold display condition is established, hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold; and
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
When a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, a notice means capable of executing at least the prescribed notice;
A game machine equipped with
The notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied,
The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the variation icon has a mode related to the hold icon.

(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
A holding icon storage means capable of storing one or a plurality of holding icons having different modes;
Fluctuation icon storage means capable of storing one or a plurality of fluctuation icons having different modes;
When the first notice condition is met, the notice condition is met,
Even when the second notice condition different from the first notice condition is established, the notice condition is established,
When the first notice condition is satisfied, the notice means determines a predetermined form from the change icons stored in the change icon storage means as the notice, and the change icon is used in the form. Can be displayed at least,
When the second notice condition is satisfied, the notice means determines a predetermined form from the hold icons stored in the hold icon storage means as the notice, and the hold icon is used in the form. Can be displayed at least,
The variation icon storage means stores at least a common variation icon,
The game table, wherein the hold icon storage means stores at least a common hold icon in the same mode as the common variation icon.

(Appendix 3)
In the game stand described in Appendix 2,
The gaming table, wherein the variation icon storage means stores at least a unique variation icon having a different form from the common variation icon.

(Appendix 4)
In the game stand described in Appendix 3,
The hold icon storage means stores at least a unique hold icon in a mode different from the common variation icon and the unique variation icon,
The game table, wherein the variation icon storage means stores a larger number of the unique variation icons than the number of the unique reservation icons stored in the reservation icon storage means.

(Appendix 5)
When a predetermined hold storage condition is satisfied, hold storage means capable of storing at least predetermined start information as hold,
When a predetermined hold display condition is established, hold display means capable of displaying at least one hold icon corresponding to one hold; and
When a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the determination result determination unit capable of executing at least the determination of success / failure;
When a predetermined symbol variation condition is established, after performing symbol variation, a symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation stop display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination;
If a predetermined notice condition is satisfied, a notice means capable of at least starting the prescribed notice,
A game machine equipped with
The notice means is capable of displaying at least a predetermined variation icon as the notice when the predetermined notice condition is satisfied,
The notice means is capable of displaying the variation icon after the symbol variation is started,
The notice means is capable of at least stopping the display of the change icon when a predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied after the change icon is displayed,
When the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied,
Even when a second notice stop condition different from the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the predetermined notice stop condition is satisfied,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the variation icon has a mode related to the hold icon.

(Appendix 6)
In the game stand described in Appendix 5,
The first notice cancellation condition is established during a predetermined symbol variation display period,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second notice stop condition is satisfied after the first notice stop condition is satisfied during the predetermined symbol variation display period.

(Appendix 7)
In the game stand according to appendix 5 or 6,
The second notice stop condition is established with a first probability when the symbol display unit executes a specific symbol variation display in which the symbol mode corresponding to the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. ,
The second notice stop condition is the first probability when the symbol display unit executes symbol variation display that stops and displays a symbol aspect corresponding to a result determination result different from the specific result determination result. Is established with a second probability different from
The game machine characterized in that the first probability is higher than the second probability.

(Appendix 8)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 5 to 7,
When the first notice stop condition is satisfied, the notice means stops the display of the fluctuation icon in the first mode.
The game machine is characterized in that the notice means stops the display of the variable icon in a second mode different from the first mode when the second notice stop condition is satisfied. .

(Appendix 9)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 5 to 8,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the notice means is capable of at least resuming the display of the change icon when a predetermined notice resumption condition is satisfied after the display of the change icon is stopped.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; Or a slot machine with, is also suitable in such Parrott to game medium game balls.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine), a ball game machine (pachinko machine), and the like.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 200 Game board 208 Decoration symbol display device 208a-208c Symbol display area 208h Normal hold display area 208j Special hold display area 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 218 1st special figure hold lamp 220 1st 2 special figure holding lamp 224 first production movable body 225 second production movable body 230 first special figure starting port 232 second special figure starting port 234 first variable winning port 235 second variable winning port 246 shielding device 300 main control unit 400 1st sub control part 500 2nd sub control part

Gaming table according to the present invention includes at least storable memorize means startup information, at least derivable prefetching means a plurality of types of read-ahead result, at least viable prefetching notifying means a plurality of types of read-ahead warning, A gaming table comprising at least a decorative symbol display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of decorative symbol variation display, wherein the prefetching notice means is capable of executing at least the prefetching notice corresponding to the prefetching result. , At least one of the plurality of types of prefetching results is a first prefetching result, at least one of the plurality of types of prefetching results is a second prefetching result, and the plurality of types of prefetching results At least one of the notices is a first look-ahead notice, at least one of the plurality of types of look-ahead notices is a second look-ahead notice, At least one of several types of decorative symbol variation displays is a first decorative symbol variation display, at least one of the plurality of types of decorative symbol variation displays is a second decorative symbol variation display, The prefetching notice means is capable of at least executing the first prefetching notice condition when the first prefetching notice condition is established, and the prefetching notice means satisfies the second prefetch notice condition. The second prefetch notice can be executed at least, and the prefetch means derives the first prefetch result when the start information is the first start information. The prefetching means includes a case of deriving the second prefetching result when the starting information is second starting information, and the first prefetching notice condition is Look ahead A case where the result is the first prefetching result, and the second prefetching notice condition is satisfied when the prefetching result is the second prefetching result. The decorative design display means is capable of executing the first decorative design variation display when the first execution condition is satisfied , and the decorative design display means When the execution condition is established, the second decorative symbol variation display can be executed, and the first execution condition is when the start information is the first start information, The second execution condition includes a case where the second execution condition is satisfied when the start information is the second start information . At least one of the first decorative symbol variation display The game stand is characterized by suggesting the contents, and at least one of the second prefetch notices does not suggest the contents of the second decorative symbol variation display .

Claims (4)

Start information storage means capable of storing start information generated based on a game ball entering the start area;
The start / failure determination means for acquiring the start information stored in the start information storage means, and determining the correct / incorrect determination based on the acquired start information and the gaming state when the start information is acquired;
A symbol display means for performing symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display;
A gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state after a specific symbol aspect is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means;
Prefetching means capable of prefetching starting information stored in the starting information storage means;
A decorative symbol display means capable of executing a decorative symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol aspect corresponding to the symbol aspect after starting the variation of the decorative symbol;
Production control means capable of controlling the decorative symbol display means;
A game machine equipped with
The effect control means is configured so that the success / failure determination means corresponds to the prefetch result of the prefetch means before the execution of the symbol variation display based on the start information stored in the start information storage means. Can be used to give notice of whether or not to derive
The prefetch means can derive a first success / failure type and a second success / failure type as a prefetch result of the start information,
The production control means, when the prefetching result obtained by the prefetching means prefetching the start information is the first success / failure type, gives a first notice to notify the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information. When the pre-reading result obtained by pre-reading the start-up information by the pre-read means is the second correct / invalid type, a second notice that is not related to the contents of the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the start information is executed. Is possible,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 1,
The number of the first notices that can be selected by the effect control means is larger than the number of the second notices.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The success / failure determination means can execute the determination of success / failure based on the acquired start information and the gaming state when the start information is acquired.
In the first success / failure type, the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means becomes the first game result regardless of the gaming state when the success / failure determination means acquires the start information.
In the second success / failure type, the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determination means becomes the first game result or the second game result according to the gaming state when the success / failure determination means acquires the start information,
When the prefetching result of the prefetching means is the second winning / non-winning type and the success / failure determination result of the success / failure determining means may be the second game result, the effect control means The notice notice can be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The gaming control means can control the gaming state to any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first state and a second state that is more advantageous than the first state.
The second success / failure type is the first game result and the gaming state of the second state when the gaming state when the success / failure determination unit acquires the start information is the first state. The result of the second game,
A game stand characterized by that.